JP6933246B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and a dynamic display of a special symbol for notifying the lottery result is displayed as a display device. It has been proposed that it is configured to be performed in.

For example, in Patent Document 1, the probability that the game ball wins the starting port provided on the game board surface is changed by adjusting the interval of the nails provided on the game board surface.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2003-305209

However, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of games .

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the enjoyment of gaming.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention has a display means for displaying game information related to the game, and a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the specific game information is displayed on the display means. It has a privileged game executing means for executing a game, and has a distribution ball means capable of distributing a game ball to a plurality of flow paths, and the distribution ball means is the distribution. A distribution ball opening in which a game ball can enter the ball means and a game ball entering the distribution entrance are placed in the plurality of flow paths according to a predetermined rule. The gaming machine has a flow path switching means for switching and distributing the flow path through which the balls flow down, and the gaming machine updates the count value according to the number of gaming balls that have entered the distribution slot. With the establishment of the ball number counting means and the condition for starting the dynamic display of the pseudo-identification information which is one of the game information, a plurality of pseudo-identification information is provided based on the count value of the ball entry counting means. Among the dynamic display modes, there is a pseudo-dynamic display mode determining means for determining one pseudo-dynamic display mode, and one of the plurality of flow paths is filled with a game ball. This is configured to guide the game ball to the privilege entry means to which the privilege that is advantageous to the player is given, and the cover member provided in front of the flow path switching means has the flow path. pattern for making it difficult visually recognize the switching means that have been attached.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention , a display means for displaying game information related to a game and a privilege for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player when the specific game information is displayed on the display means. It has a game execution means, and has a distribution ball means capable of distributing a game ball to a plurality of flow paths, and the distribution ball means has a game in the distribution ball means. A distribution ball opening in which a ball can enter and a flow in which the game ball entering the distribution entrance is flowed down into the plurality of flow paths according to a predetermined rule. The gaming machine has a flow path switching means for switching and distributing routes, and the gaming machine has a ball entry counting means for updating a count value according to the number of game balls entering the distribution slot. , With the establishment of the condition for starting the dynamic display of the pseudo-identification information, which is one of the game information, the dynamic display mode of the plurality of pseudo-identification information based on the count value of the ball entry counting means. Among them, one of the pseudo-dynamic display mode determining means for determining one pseudo-dynamic display mode is provided, and one of the plurality of flow paths is accessible to the player when the game ball enters. It is configured to guide the game ball to the privilege entry means to which the advantageous privilege is given, and it is difficult to visually recognize the flow path switching means on the cover member provided in front of the flow path switching means. pattern of order to to is that has been attached.

Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which see through the inside from the front side of the sorting apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which see through the inside from the front side with the game ball winning in the distribution device in 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the structure of the various counters, the special symbol execution area, the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area, and the ordinary symbol holding ball execution area in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing a random number table per special symbol in the first embodiment. Yes, (c) is a diagram schematically showing a random number table per ordinary symbol in the first embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a special hit type counter in the first embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a pseudo-variation table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing a background selection table in the first embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the variation mode of the special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device, and (b) is a pseudo symbol in the ceiling variation pattern displayed on the third symbol display device. It is a figure which schematically showed the variation mode when the variation of a special symbol is started during the variation of. It is a figure which shows typically the variation mode when the variation of a special symbol is started during the variation of the pseudo symbol other than the ceiling variation pattern displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an ending notification mode for notifying the player that it was a big hit with a time saving displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment (b). ) Is a diagram schematically showing an ending notification mode for notifying the player that the jackpot was a jackpot without a time reduction displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 3C is a diagram. , The figure schematically shows the background display mode of the precursor A displayed on the third symbol display device, and (d) schematically shows the background display mode of the precursor B displayed on the third symbol display device. FIG. 3 (e) is a diagram schematically showing a background display mode of the precursor C displayed on the third symbol display device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the distribution device error notification control processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the distribution winning process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the distribution discharge processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a part of the distribution position initialization processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a part of the distribution position initialization processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the distribution error processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the ending setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the pseudo-variation process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the background selection process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which looked at the inside from the front side of the sorting apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which see through the inside from the front side with the game ball winning in the distribution device in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 5 is an enlarged perspective view of a variable winning device and a distribution winning device during a jackpot game in the second embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the structure of the various counters, the special symbol execution area, the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area, and the ordinary symbol holding ball execution area in the 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing a random number table per special symbol in the second embodiment. Yes, (c) is a diagram schematically showing a random number table per first ordinary symbol in the second embodiment, and (d) is a diagram schematically showing a random number table per second ordinary symbol in the second embodiment. It is a figure shown. It is a figure which showed typically the special hit type table in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a status selection table in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing a pseudo-variation table in the second embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a background selection table in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing a random number setting table in the second embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a variation mode when the variation of the special symbol is started while the precursor A pseudo variation mode of the pseudo symbol displayed by the third symbol display device in the second embodiment is fluctuating. In (b), the variation mode when the variation of the special symbol is started while the precursor B pseudo variation mode of the pseudo symbol displayed by the third symbol display device in the second embodiment is changed schematically. It is a figure shown. It is a figure which shows typically the variation mode at the time when the variation of a special symbol is started while the precursor C pseudo variation mode of the pseudo symbol displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the 2nd embodiment is changing. (A) shows the variation mode when the interrupt normal pseudo variation mode corresponding to the hit of the normal symbol is started while the variation mode of the pseudo symbol displayed by the third symbol display device in the second embodiment is changed. It is a diagram schematically shown, and (b) is a normal normal corresponding to a hit of a normal symbol when the variation mode of the pseudo symbol displayed by the third symbol display device in the second embodiment is stopped and displayed. It is a figure which showed typically the variation mode when the pseudo variation mode is started. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start processing 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the distribution winning process 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the status determination process which is one process of the distribution winning process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st ordinary symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal entrance processing which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st distribution correction processing which is one process of the normal ball entrance processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the random setting process which is one process of the jackpot control process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the distribution error processing 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the pseudo-variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the background selection process 2 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 35, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a distribution winning device 64 provided on the game board 13. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the inside from the front, FIG. 4 is a detailed view of the inside of the distribution prime minister 64 provided on the game board 13 from the front, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 67, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of glass is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when the display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2), which will be described later, is variable (for example, the color of the displayed character is variable). ..

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is chrome-plated, is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and driving of the ball launch unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a for this purpose, push-button type stop switch 51b that stops the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 by the change in electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance and rails 61, 62, a distribution winning device 64, and a first. The two start winning device 300, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The distribution winning device 64, the second starting port 300, the first variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed with wood screws or the like. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and the fired ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

A distribution winning device 64 is provided in the lower center of the game area. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the distribution winning device 64 when viewed from the front. The distribution winning device 64 is composed of a vertically elongated case body, and a ball entry port 640 in which a game ball can enter is provided above the distribution winning device 64. The ball entry port 640 is composed of a gate-type sensor that can detect that a game ball has passed. Inside the distribution winning device 64, a first distribution rotation member 64a1 capable of distributing the game ball to the left or right by rotating is provided. The first distribution rotating member 64a1 is rotatably supported by a case body constituting the distribution winning device 64.

The case body constituting the distribution winning device 64 is made of a transparent resin (for example, polycarbonate PC or the like) whose inside can be seen through. On the case body, patterns printed with paint so that the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 provided inside are difficult to see (for example, ripple patterns with narrow intervals, characters such as numbers). Is drawn, and the pattern is configured so that the movement of the game ball flowing down in the distribution winning device 64 can be visually recognized from the gap.

With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to recognize the positions and states of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8, and the distribution winning device 64 can be visually recognized from the outside of the gaming machine. It is difficult to determine how many more balls will win the first starting port 71.

The first distribution rotating member 64a1 is formed in a semicircular shape, and the wall portions are projected from the center of the semicircle in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction to the front side of the gaming machine, and pass through the ball entry port 640. It has a first accommodating portion 64c1 and a second accommodating portion 64d1 capable of receiving the game ball. The first distribution rotating member 64a1 is a wall portion that protrudes toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 and is formed vertically upward from the center of the semicircle toward the arc side in a state where the semicircular arc is directed upward. As the origin, the state in which the first accommodating portion 64c1 is directed upward in the gaming machine (direction of the ball entry port 640) and the state in which the second accommodating portion 64d1 is directed above the gaming machine (ball entry port 640) are taken as the origin. It is pivotally supported so as to be rotatable about 90 degrees to the left and right in a state facing the direction). Specifically, when the first distribution rotating member 64a1 rotates to the right and the first accommodating portion 64c1 rotates to a position facing upward of the gaming machine, the first distribution rotating member 64a1 moves further to the right. Rotation is prohibited by abutting on a stopper portion (not shown) that prohibits rotation in the direction. When the first storage portion 64c1 is rotated upward from the state in which the first storage portion 64c1 is directed upward and the first distribution rotation member 64a1 is rotated to the left so that the second storage portion 64d1 is oriented upward, the first distribution rotation is performed. Rotation is prohibited by contacting the stopper portion (not shown) that prohibits the member 64a1 from rotating further to the left. That is, in the first distribution rotating member 64a1, the position where the first accommodating portion 64c1 faces upward is set as the rotation region to the right, and the position where the second accommodating portion 64d1 faces upward is rotated to the left. It is configured as an area.

The first distribution rotation member 64a1 receives the game ball that has passed through the ball entry port 640 at the first accommodation unit 64c1 or the second accommodation unit 64d1 of the first distribution rotation member 64a1. When the game ball is received by the first accommodating portion 64c1, the first taxiing rotation member 64a1 rotates counterclockwise in the front view (see FIG. 3) due to the weight of the game ball to rotate the game ball first. It is guided to the first discharge guide path 64z1 that guides to the discharge port 650a1. Here, the first distribution rotating member 64a1 is configured to be rotatable about 90 degrees left and right (rotation angle with the magnet 64b1 facing vertically upward), and is configured with the first accommodating portion 64c1. A magnet 64b1 is provided at the tip of the boundary wall with the second accommodating portion 64d1.

The distribution winning device 64 includes a second distribution rotation member 64a2, a third distribution rotation member 64a3, a fourth distribution rotation member 64a4, and a fifth distribution, which are configured in the same manner as the first distribution rotation member 64a1. A rotating member 64a5, a sixth distribution rotating member 64a6, a seventh distribution rotating member 64a7, and an eighth distribution rotating member 64a8 are attached. A second taxiing rotating member 64a2 is attached to a position diagonally to the lower right of the first taxiing rotating member 64a1 at a position where the taxiing ball distributed by the second accommodating portion 64d1 receives the taxiing ball that has rolled on the first guide path 64z2. Has been done. At the lower left diagonally of the second taxiing rotating member 64a2, a third position is where the taxiing ball distributed by the first accommodating portion 64c2 of the second taxiing rotating member 64a2 receives the game ball that has rolled on the second guide path 64z4. The taxiing rotation member 64a3 is attached. A fourth taxiing rotating member 64a4 is attached to a position diagonally to the lower right of the third taxiing rotating member 64a3 at a position where the taxiing ball distributed by the second accommodating portion 64d3 receives the taxiing ball that has rolled on the third guide path 64z6. Has been done. A fifth taxiing rotation member 64a5 is attached to a position where the taxiing ball distributed by the first accommodating portion 64c4 receives the game ball that has rolled on the fourth guide path 64z8 at the lower left diagonally of the fourth taxiing rotation member 64a4. ing. A sixth taxiing rotating member 64a6 is attached to a position where the taxiing ball distributed by the second accommodating portion 64d5 receives the taxiing ball that has rolled on the fifth taxiing path 64z10 at the lower right of the fifth taxiing rotating member 64a5. Has been done. A seventh taxiing rotation member 64a7 is attached to a position where the taxiing ball distributed by the first accommodating portion 64c6 receives the game ball that has rolled on the sixth taxiing path 64z12 at the lower left diagonally of the sixth taxiing rotation member 64a6. ing. The eighth taxiing rotating member 64a8 is attached to a position where the taxiing ball distributed by the second accommodating portion 64d7 receives the taxiing ball that has rolled on the seventh taxiing path 64z14 at the lower right of the seventh taxiing rotating member 64a7. Has been done. The second to eighth taxiing rotating members 64a2 to 64a8 are the game balls flowing down the first to seventh guide paths 64z2 to 64z14 and the magnets 64b1 to the positions of the taxiing rotating members facing upward from the game machine. It is arranged at a position where it collides with 64b8.

The first base side magnet 900a1, the second base side magnet 900a2, the third base side magnet 900a3, and the fourth base side magnet are attached to the back side base body to which the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 are attached. 900a4, a fifth base side magnet 900a5, a sixth base side magnet 900a6, a seventh base side magnet 900a7, and an eighth base side magnet 900a8 are arranged, respectively. The first to eighth base side magnets 900a1 to 900a8 face the positions where the magnets 64b1 to 64b8 of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 face vertically upward and the positions facing each other in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine. It is arranged like this.

More specifically, the magnet 64b1 of the first distribution rotating member 64a1 and the first base-side magnet 900a1 are configured to have polarities that repel each other. Specifically, the first base side magnet 900a1 is composed of a rod-shaped magnet fixed to the back side base body, and is configured so that a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) is generated at the tip portion. .. The first base side magnet 900a1 is arranged and fixed so that the tip end portion faces the first distribution rotating member 64a1 side.

The magnet 64b1 of the first distribution rotation member 64a1 is also composed of a rod-shaped magnet like the first base side magnet 900a1, and the first distribution rotation is performed so that the tip portion faces the first base side magnet 900a1 side. It is fixed to the member 64a1. At a position where the first distribution rotating member 64a1 rotates and the boundary wall between the first accommodating portion 64c1 and the second accommodating portion 64d1 comes directly above (on the center line of the entry port 640), the first base side magnet 900a1 and The magnet 64b1 of the first distribution rotating member 64a1 is in the closest position (the tips face each other). Here, since the magnets are arranged so as to have the same polarity (for example, N pole and N pole), they repel each other and stop at a position where the boundary wall of the first distribution rotating member 64a1 faces directly upward. It will be maintained in the position where it is rotated to the left or right.

As a result, in the first distribution rotating member 64a1, when the boundary wall between the first accommodating portion 64c1 and the second accommodating portion 64d1 is located on the center line of the ball entry port 640 (position vertically above), the magnet 64b1 And the first base side magnet 900a1 repel each other, so that the first distribution rotating member 64a1 rotates to the left or right, and either the first accommodation unit 64c1 or the second accommodation unit 64d1 is a distribution winning device. It comes to face the side that receives the game ball entering 64 (upper side of the game machine). Therefore, the entered game ball comes into contact with the boundary wall between the first accommodating portion 64c1 and the second accommodating portion 64d1, causing ball clogging, or the game ball is first accommodating the first distribution rotating member 64a1. It is possible to prevent the flow down to either the left or right side without being accommodated in the portion 64c1 and the second accommodating portion d1.

Further, when the magnet 64b1 and the first base side magnet 900a1 repel each other, for example, the first accommodating portion 64c1 receives the game ball and rotates about 90 degrees to the left to move the game ball to the first discharge guide path 64z1. After the induction, it is possible to prevent the first distribution rotating member 64a1 from rotating clockwise (the first accommodating portion 64c1 faces upward). As a result, after guiding the game ball to the first discharge guide path 64z1, the second accommodating portion 64d1 is in a state of facing upward, and then the game ball that has entered the first taxiing winning device 64a1 is the second. Upon receiving the accommodating portion 64d1, the first taxiing rotating member 64a1 rotates about 180 degrees to the right from that state due to the weight of the game ball, and guides the game ball to the first guide path 64z2. In this way, the first taxiing rotating member 64a1 can alternately guide the game ball entering the taxiing winning device 64 to the first discharge guide path 64z1 and the first guide path 64z2. Therefore, the game balls can be evenly distributed to the first discharge guide path 64z1 and the first guide path 64z2 to win a prize.

The second to eighth distribution rotation members 64a2 to 64a8 are also configured by the same mechanism as the first distribution rotation member 64a1. Further, the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 are usually configured to rotate according to the weight of the game ball, but as will be described later, the RAM erasing switch 122 is operated to perform the main control. In the start-up process (FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201 of the device 110, in the distribution position initialization process (FIG. 25, S1015), the distribution position adjusting motor 263 of the distribution winning device 64 sets the initial position to a predetermined position. The 1st distribution rotation member 64a1 to the 8th distribution rotation member 64a8 are rotated to predetermined initial positions (in the present embodiment, positions for guiding the game balls to the first to eighth discharge guide paths 64z1 to 64z15, respectively). It is moved and set. Here, the initial position is a position when the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e, which will be described later, is 0 (a state in which 0 or 256 game balls have entered the distribution winning device 64). "1" indicating that the first accommodating portion 64c1 of the 1 distribution rotating member 64a1 is facing upward, and the position where the second accommodating portion 64d2 of the second distribution rotating member 64a2 is facing upward. "0" indicating that, "1" indicating that the first accommodating portion 64c3 of the third distribution rotating member 64a3 is facing upward, and the second accommodating portion 64d4 of the fourth distribution rotating member 64a4 "0" indicating that the position is facing upward, "1" indicating that the first accommodating portion 64c5 of the fifth distribution rotating member 64a5 is facing upward, "1" indicating that the position is facing upward, the sixth distribution rotating member. "0" indicating that the second accommodating portion 64d6 of 64a6 is facing upward, and "1" indicating that the first accommodating portion 64c7 of the seventh distribution rotating member 64a7 is facing upward. , "0" indicating that the first accommodating portion 64d8 of the eighth distribution rotating member 64a8 is facing upward is set to the initial position by setting "10101010" as continuous data. NS.

Further, the second taxiing rotation member 64a2 causes the game ball flowing down the first taxiing path 64z2 to flow down to the first taxiing section 64c2 or when the first taxiing rotation member 64a1 distributes the game ball to the first taxiing path 64z2. It is received by the second accommodating portion 64d2 and guided to the second discharge guide path 64z3 or the second guide path 64z4. In this way, the first taxiing rotation member 64a1 to the seventh taxiing rotation member 64a7 continuously guide the game ball from the first taxiing path 64z2 to the seventh taxiing path 64z14, thereby rotating the eighth taxiing. The game ball reaches the member 64a8. When the game ball is received by the first accommodating portion 64c8 of the eighth taxiing rotation member 64a8 and the game ball is distributed to the eighth guide path 64z16, the game ball flowing down the eighth guide path 64z16 is guided to the first starting port 71. It is taxied and enters the ball.

In the initialized state of the gaming machine, the first taxiing rotating member 64a1 to the eighth taxiing rotating member 64a8 guide the game ball from the first discharge guide path 64z1 to the eighth discharge guide path 64z15, respectively. It is placed in position.

Specifically, in the first, third, fifth, and seventh distribution rotating members 64a1, 64a3, 64a5, 64a7, the positions where the first accommodating portions 64c1, 64c3, 64c5, 64c7 face upward of the gaming machine (right). It is set to the state of being rotated to the position where it is rotated by the maximum angle in the direction). On the other hand, in the second, fourth, sixth, and eighth distribution rotating members 64a2, 64a4, 64a6, 64a8, the positions where the second accommodating portions 64d2, 64d4, 64d6, 64d8 face upward of the gaming machine (maximum to the left). It is set to the state of being rotated to the position where it is rotated by an angle).

Therefore, when the game ball enters the entry port 640 from the initial state, the game ball that enters the first ball enters the first accommodating portion 64c1, and the first distribution rotation member 64a1 rotates to the left. Then, it is guided to the first discharge guide path 64z1. As a result, the game ball is discharged to the outside by the distribution winning device 64. At this time, the first distribution rotating member 64a1 is stopped at a position where the second accommodating portion 64d1 faces upward. Next, the second game ball that enters the entry port 640 enters the second accommodating portion 64d1 of the first distribution rotation member 64a1, and the first distribution rotation member 64a2 rotates to the right. , The game ball is distributed to the first guide path 64z2. The game ball that has flowed down the first taxiing path 64z2 enters the second accommodating portion 64d2 of the second taxiing rotating member 64a2, and the second taxiing rotating member 64a2 rotates to the right and the second discharge taxiing path 64z3. Sort the game balls to.

Next, the third game ball that has entered the entry port 640 enters the first accommodating portion 64c1 of the first distribution rotation member 64a1 and is distributed to the first discharge guide path 64z1. The game ball that has entered the fourth ball enters the second accommodating portion 64d1 of the first taxiing rotating member 64a1, is guided to the first guide path 64z2, and enters the first accommodating portion 64c2 of the second taxiing rotating member 64a2. A game ball enters and is distributed to the second guide path 64z4. As described above, in order for the second taxiing rotation member 64a2 to distribute the game balls to the second guide path 64z4, it is necessary for the four game balls to enter the ball entry port 640. Similarly, until the third taxiing rotation member 64a3 guides the game ball to the third guide path 64z6, it is necessary for eight game balls to enter the ball entry port 640. Similarly, the fourth taxiing rotating member 64a4 has 16 balls, the fifth taxiing rotating member 64a5 has 32 balls, the sixth taxiing rotating member 64a6 has 64 balls, the seventh taxiing rotating member 64a7 has 128 balls, and the eighth taxiing. In the minute rotation member 64a8, 256 balls are required to distribute the game balls from the fourth guide path 64z8 to the eighth guide path 64z16, respectively.

That is, 256 game balls enter the distribution winning device 64 from the initial state of the distribution winning device 64 (0 game balls entered) to the time when the game balls enter the first starting port 71. You need to sphere. As will be described later, when a game ball enters the first starting port 71, it is determined to be a jackpot (all jackpot random numbers are determined to be jackpots), so once for every 256 balls entered. Is configured to always generate a big hit. With this configuration, the player can play the game for the purpose of getting more game balls into the distribution winning device 64, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. Can be done.

The first taxiing rotation member 64a1 is provided with a rotation angle sensor 670a1 for detecting the stop position, and the first taxiing rotation member 64a1 guides the game ball to the first discharge guide path 64z1 (the first). 1 The main control device 110 determines whether the housing unit 64c1 is facing upward) or the game ball is guided to the first guide path 64z2 (the second housing unit 64d1 is facing upward). The configuration is such that the MPU 201 of the above can be detected. Similarly, the second distribution rotation member 64a2 has a rotation angle sensor 670a2, the third distribution rotation member 64a3 has a rotation angle sensor 670a3, and the fourth distribution rotation member 64a4 has a rotation angle sensor 670a4. The distribution rotation member 64a5 has a rotation angle sensor 670a5, the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6 has a rotation angle sensor 670a6, the seventh distribution rotation member 64a7 has a rotation angle sensor 670a7, and the eighth distribution rotation member 64a8. Are provided with rotation angle sensors 670a8, respectively.

The rotation angle sensors 670a1 to 670a8 constitute a distribution position confirmation sensor 262, and the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 pachinko the first accommodating portions 64c1 to 64c8 with respect to the main control device 110. In the state of being rotated to the position facing upward (the position rotating to the right) of the machine 10, "1" indicating that the rotation angle is positive is output, and the second accommodating portions 64d1 to 64d8 are moved upward. In the state of being rotated to the facing position (the position rotated to the left), "0" indicating that the rotation angle is negative is output.

The game ball guided to the first discharge guide path 64z1 passes through the first discharge port 650a1 and is discharged to the outside of the taxiing winning device 64, and flows down the front surface of the game board 13 again. The first discharge port 650a1 is composed of a gate-type sensor capable of detecting that the game ball has passed, and is configured to be detectable by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. With the same configuration, the game ball guided to the second discharge guide path 64z3 is from the second discharge port 650a2, and the game ball guided to the third discharge guide path 64z5 is from the third discharge port 650a3 to the fourth discharge guide path. The game ball guided to 64z7 is from the fourth discharge port 650a4, the game ball guided to the fifth discharge guide path 64z9 is from the fifth discharge port 650a5, and the game ball guided to the sixth discharge guide path 64z11 is the sixth. The game balls guided from the discharge port 650a6 to the seventh discharge guide path 64z13 are discharged from the seventh discharge port 650a7, and the game balls guided to the eighth discharge guide path 64z15 are discharged from the eighth discharge port 650a8.

Since the game balls that have passed through the ball entry ports 640 and the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8 of the distribution winning device 64 are detected by the sensors, the game balls that have entered the distribution winning device 64 The number, currently, the number of game balls that have entered the distribution winning device 64 can be grasped by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can recognize the number of game balls to be entered in the distribution winning device 64 required for the next big hit. Therefore, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 71, is the number of game balls entered in the distribution winning device 64 the number of balls winning in the first starting opening 71 (this implementation)? In the form, by discriminating 256 pieces), it is possible to determine whether or not the game ball is illegally won a prize in the first starting port 71.

Further, by grasping the number of game balls currently entered in the distribution winning device 64, it is possible to recognize whether or not there is an illegally entered game ball. Specifically, for example, when a hole is made from the outside of the distribution winning device 64 and a game ball is inserted from a path other than the passing port 640, the number of ejected balls is larger than the number of passing balls. By doing so, fraud can be recognized.

Furthermore, even if a problem occurs in which the game balls are clogged in the distribution winning device 64, the difference in the number of game balls that have passed through the entry port 640 and the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8 Since the notification is sent when the number reaches a certain number (10 in the present embodiment), the ball clogging can be detected at an early stage and the ball clogging can be cleared by the game store side.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the second distribution rotation member 64a2 is located at the lower right of the first distribution rotation member 64a1, and the third distribution rotation member 64a3 is located at the lower left of the second distribution rotation member 64a2. The fourth distribution rotation member 64a4 is located at the lower right of the third distribution rotation member 64a3, the fifth distribution rotation member 64a5 is located at the lower left of the fourth distribution rotation member 64a4, and the fifth distribution rotation member 64a5 is located at the right. The sixth distribution rotation member 64a6 is arranged below, the seventh distribution rotation member 64a7 is arranged at the lower left of the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6, and the eighth distribution rotation member 64a8 is arranged at the lower right of the seventh distribution rotation member 64a7. By doing so, the distribution winning device 64 can be compactly configured by suppressing the use of space in the left-right direction as compared with the case where the distribution rotation members are arranged side by side in the left direction or the right direction.

In the present embodiment, the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 are arranged alternately (in a zigzag position) as shown in FIG. 3, but are arranged side by side in one direction in the left or right direction. By doing so, when setting the initial position, it can be set by moving all the distribution rotating members in one direction, so that the initial position setting process can be facilitated.

In the present embodiment, the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 are used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and 10 or more distribution rotation members may be arranged. It may be configured to arrange less than eight. In this way, by changing the number of distribution rotating members, the number of game balls required to win the first starting port 71 can be changed, and the probability of obtaining a big hit can be adjusted. can.

Further, the number of distribution rotating members may be adjusted so that the game store can adjust the number. Specifically, the distribution rotation member and the start port are configured to be removable, and the game store can install and set them according to the convenience of the game store, so that the game can be performed by adjusting according to the convenience of the game store. be able to. In addition, since it can be changed depending on the day, it can be adjusted so that the balance between the game store and the player is appropriate by changing it according to the sales.

Further, in the present embodiment, a random number value is set so that when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 71, it is determined that all the balls are hit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot probability may be set as appropriate. good.

FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing the flow of a game ball of a game ball that has entered the ball entry port 640 of the distribution winning device 64. IN shown in FIG. 4 indicates the flow direction of the game ball guided to the first to eighth guide paths 64z2 to 64z16, and OUT indicates the game guided to the first to eighth discharge guide paths 64z1 to 64z15. It shows the direction of flow of the sphere.

Although omitted in FIG. 3, as shown in FIG. 4, the first to eighth facing members 64t1 to 64t8 face each other of the first to eighth guide paths 64z2 to 64z16 of the taxiing winning device 64. Each is provided. The first to eighth facing members 64t1 to 64t8 are composed of wall portions protruding toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and are arranged so as to guide the game ball to the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8. Has been done. Further, even when the momentum of the game ball flowing down the first to eighth guide paths 64z2 to 64z16 is strong, the game ball is guided by the first to eighth facing members 64t1 to 64t8, so that the game ball is guided by the first to eighth guide paths 64t1 to 64t8. It is possible to suppress a problem that the taxiing rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 are not guided to the taxiing rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 and are discharged from the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. A normal symbol start port 67 is provided on the right side of the center of the game board 13. The normal symbol start port 67 is composed of a gate type start port having a sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball. When the game ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67, a lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the lottery performed for the passing of the game ball to the normal symbol start port 67, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is a hit.

When the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started in the second symbol display device 83 provided in the variable display device unit 80, which will be described later, and "○" and "×" are displayed. After the symbols of No. 1 are alternately lit for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds), a normal symbol (a symbol of "○" or "×" in the present embodiment) indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed (lighted). If a ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67 while the variable display is being performed in the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is the number of reserved balls 37. Is displayed by. As will be described later, in the normal game state (non-time saving state), the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 0% (a random number value determined to be a hit is not set). On the other hand, in the time-saving game state, the winning probability is set to 100% (all random values are determined to be winning).

In the present embodiment, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 0% in the normal gaming state (non-time saving time), but the winning probability is not limited to this, and the winning probability is low as long as the game playability is not hindered. For example, it may be configured to be set to 1/1000, etc.). Here, in the normal game state, the game ball is fired on the right side of the game area, that is, the right side (a game method in which the normal symbol start port 67 is made to win the game ball in an attempt to win the normal symbol). It is not necessary to set the probability so that it will be advantageous to the player by being performed.

When it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, the second symbol display device 83 is lit and displayed with "○", which is a symbol indicating that the lottery of the normal symbol was a hit. When the winning symbol is displayed, the normal electric accessory is activated, and the blades 300a and 300b of the ordinary electric accessory, which are normally maintained in an upward standing state, are approximately V from a state in which they are approximately vertically upright. The blades 300a and 300b guide the game ball by moving in a character shape (inverted C shape), so that the game ball can be easily inserted for a predetermined time (3s in the present embodiment). On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of order, the second symbol display device 83 is lit and displayed with "x", which is a symbol indicating that the lottery of the ordinary symbol was out of order.

A first symbol display provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). The device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate the number of reserved spheres, which is the number of spheres (reserved spheres) for which the variation display has not been executed, among the spheres that have been won in the normal symbol start port 67, by the lighting state. The number of rounds during the jackpot and the error display are also indicated by the corresponding lighting state.

The 7-segment display 37b is composed of two 7-segment LEDs on the left and right. On the left and right 7-segment LEDs, a special symbol indicating the determination result of the lottery game based on the winning of the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300 is variablely displayed (dynamically displayed). Specifically, the variable display (in the present embodiment, the center of 7 segments) is determined until the variable time (dynamic display time) elapses, which is determined based on the winning of the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300. After the segment of is blinking, it is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating the judgment result. If the determination result is out of alignment, the central one segment is lit and a symbol “−−” indicating the deviation is displayed. On the other hand, when the determination result is a hit, a symbol different from the symbol indicating the deviation such as the symbols "33" and "77" corresponding to the hit is displayed. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 71 and the second starting port 300, it is always determined to be a big hit (the value of the random number counter C1 per all special symbols is determined to be a big hit). Therefore, the fluctuation of the special symbol is started, and the symbol displayed as a stop is a symbol indicating a big hit.

Further, the fluctuation pattern (variation mode or dynamic display mode) in the pachinko machine 10 will be described later, but the fluctuation time is set in the fluctuation mode and corresponds to the dynamic display mode related to time information.

In the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for winning a prize in the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300, a winning or not judgment (big hit lottery) of whether or not a jackpot is made is performed, and a judgment of the jackpot type is also performed. conduct. As shown in FIG. 9, the jackpot types determined here are jackpot A (16R jackpot normal symbol time reduction period 100 times, that is, jackpot with time reduction), jackpot B (16R jackpot normal symbol time reduction period 0 times). That is, a big hit without shortening the time) is prepared. The jackpot symbol displayed on the LED 37b is a symbol indicating the jackpot type (in the present embodiment, "77" is displayed for the jackpot A and "33" is displayed for the jackpot B, for example).

Here, the "big hit A" is a big hit with a maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds, and after the big hit, the game shifts to a time-saving game state described later. In this time-saving game state, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67, the probability of being determined to be a hit is 0% (no random value determined to be a hit) to 100% (all random values are hits). (Judged) is changed and set. The time-saving game state is continuously executed until the number of changes of the special symbol reaches 100 times, and when the number of changes of the special symbol reaches 100 times, the game state shifts to the normal game state. Here, the normal game state is a game state in which the probability of being determined to be a hit is set to 0% when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by a prize (starting prize) for the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300, and is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display device 37, and has a special symbol (third symbol). ) Is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “display device”) that displays variations.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, three symbol rows of left, middle, and right are special symbols. It is displayed as one of. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. It provides a decorative display according to the situation. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

In the present embodiment, a symbol similar to the special symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is displayed as a pseudo symbol. The pseudo symbol will be described later, but a symbol similar to the special symbol is displayed as a variation of the pseudo symbol in a predetermined variation pattern based on the fact that the game ball enters the entrance 640 of the distribution winning device 64. Will be done. In the case of the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the special symbol is also started in the first symbol display device 37, but for the pseudo symbol, the variable display of the pseudo symbol is performed only by the third symbol display device 81. ..

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 12. In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300, it is determined that all the balls are hit. Therefore, as a variation pattern of the special symbol, the first starting port 71 is won. A fluctuation pattern that is a big hit is set for each of the case and the second starting port 300.

FIG. 11A is a variation pattern of the special symbol selected based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 71 when the pseudo symbol is not variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is a figure which showed a certain normal special fluctuation pattern. If the game ball wins in the first starting port 71 when the pseudo symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, the left, middle, and right symbols (numbers 1 to 9 in this embodiment) are looped (1 → 2 → ...・ ・ → 9 → 1) The variable display starts at high speed in ascending order. Then, as shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 11A, the same symbol is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, the reach state is reached, and only the middle symbol is fluctuated and displayed at a low speed. In the reach state, the voice "reach" is output from the voice output device 226. After that, as shown in FIG. 11A, the characters "reached the heavens !!" are displayed below the area where the special symbol of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed, and the player has 256 balls. Enters the distribution winning device 64, and a notification indicating that the game ball has won is displayed at the first starting port 71. After that, for example, the special symbol is stopped and displayed at "777", and is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the player has hit the jackpot.

In the present embodiment, if the game ball wins the first starting port 71, it is a gaming machine that always wins a big hit. Therefore, the player recognizes that if the first starting opening 71 wins a prize, the game machine wins a big hit. .. Therefore, the player directly connects to the jackpot that the number of balls (256 balls in the present embodiment) that the game balls will win in the first starting port 71 enters the distribution winning device 64. I understand and play games. Therefore, by displaying the characters "reaching the heavens !!", it is understood that the number of game balls required to win the first starting port 71 in the distribution winning device 64 has been entered at an early stage. It can be recognized that it will be a big hit.

In FIG. 11B, among the fluctuation patterns of the pseudo symbols shown in FIG. 10A, the ceiling fluctuation pattern selected when the number of game balls entered in the distribution winning device 64 is 256 is variable. It is a figure which showed the ceiling special variation pattern which is the variation pattern of the special symbol selected when the game ball wins a prize in the 1st start opening 71 and the variation display of a special symbol is started when it is displayed. ..

As shown in FIG. 11B, in the ceiling fluctuation pattern of the pseudo symbols, the left, middle, and right pseudo symbols (numbers 1 to 9 in this embodiment) start the fluctuation display at high speed in ascending order (FIG. Not shown). Next, the symbols with the same numbers on the left and right pseudo symbols (in the above figure of FIG. 11B, the left and right pseudo symbols stop at "7") are stopped and displayed, and the "reach" sound is output from the audio output device 226. Will be done. Then, the pseudo symbol is reduced to the upper left and displayed, and the symbol of the closed door is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as shown in the middle figure of FIG. 11B, when the game ball wins the first starting port 71 and the variation display of the special symbol is started in the ceiling special variation pattern, the pseudo symbol displayed in the upper left is displayed. The design is replaced as a special design as it is, and the closed door is opened. After that, as shown in the lower figure of FIG. 11B, the special symbol displayed in the upper left in the reach state is displayed in the center of the third symbol display device 81, and the "heavenly world reached !!" is displayed below the special symbol. The characters are displayed. After that, the special symbol is stopped and displayed at "777", and is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode for notifying that a big hit has been made.

It should be noted that this ceiling fluctuation pattern is the same time as the time (time set at the time of design) from when the game ball enters the ball entry port 640 of the distribution winning device 64 to when the game ball enters the first starting port 71. The fluctuation time is set in. Therefore, since the game ball wins the first starting port 71 at the end of the fluctuation time after the fluctuation display of the ceiling fluctuation pattern is started, the replacement with the special symbol is smoothly performed. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling unnatural. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish whether it is a variation of the pseudo symbol or a variation of the special symbol, and the variation of the pseudo symbol based on the ball entering the ball entry port 640 that does not win the first starting port 71. Even if it is displayed, it is possible to have an expectation for a big hit (a prize for the first starting port 71).

Further, when switching from the fluctuation display of the ceiling fluctuation pattern to the ceiling special fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, the fluctuation display of the ceiling special symbol is displayed after the pseudo symbol displayed on the upper left of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed. It may be configured to start.

FIG. 12 shows a special symbol selected when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 71 when the pseudo symbol is variablely displayed in a fluctuation pattern other than the ceiling fluctuation pattern in the third symbol display device 81. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the switching special variation pattern which is a variation pattern.

As shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 12, when the pseudo symbol is variablely displayed in a fluctuation pattern other than the ceiling fluctuation pattern and the game ball wins the first starting port 71, the switching is performed as shown in the middle diagram of FIG. When the variation display of the special symbol is started in the special variation pattern, the pseudo symbol that has been variablely displayed disappears and the black screen is displayed for a moment. After that, the same special symbols on the left and right are displayed in the "reach state" where they are stopped and displayed, and the characters "reached the heavens !!" are displayed. After that, a stop display is displayed with a special symbol of "777", and the player is notified that a big hit has been made.

Therefore, the player can produce a big hit even if the closed door displayed in the ceiling fluctuation pattern is not displayed, and the player has an expectation for the big hit even if the ceiling fluctuation pattern is not displayed. Can be made. In addition, by displaying the black screen for a moment at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, it is possible to give a fresh taste, and it is possible to pay attention to the subsequent fluctuation of the special symbol.

When a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 71 and the second starting port 300, the first starting port switch or the second starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on. A big hit lottery is made by the main control device 110 due to the turning on of the first start port switch and the second start port switch, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first starting port 71 and the second starting port 300 are also one of the winning openings in which three balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize.

A horizontally long rectangular variable winning device 65 is arranged on the lower right side of the game area. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery related to the jackpot of the lottery game in the main control device 110 becomes a jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to stop the jackpot after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. At the same time, the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 65 is determined by the determined type of jackpot, and both jackpot A and jackpot B can be repeated up to 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a privileged gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, when the variable winning device 65 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a hit based on winning a prize in the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300, the variable winning device 65 is based on the jackpot type. The opening / closing operation is set, and the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time or until a predetermined condition is satisfied (in the present embodiment, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

The variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. .. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward on the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. Balls that do not win any of the winning openings 63, 65a, 71, 300 are guided through the out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 5, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch (FIGS. 5, 122). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (FIGS. 5, 122) is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is desired to be returned to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. The ROM 202 stores various data, control programs, and the like for executing these processes, and the RAM 203 has a counter buffer (see FIG. 7) for storing various counters for controlling these processes. It is provided.

Here, the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 8 (a). The ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 includes a random number table 202a per special symbol, a special hit type table 202b, a random number table 202c per ordinary symbol, a variable pattern table 202d for big hits, a variable pattern table (ordinary symbol) 202e, and a normal symbol. At least the stop type command 202f, the arrival average number of seconds data 202g, the distribution initial position data 202h, the distribution accessory position data 202i, and the ceiling arrival number data 202j are set (stored).

As shown in FIG. 8B, the random number table 202a per special symbol is hit by the value of the random number counter C1 per special symbol acquired when the game ball wins in the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300. It is a data table in which the random number value determined to be is stored. In the present embodiment, all the values (0 to 109) of the random number counter C1 per special symbol are stored in the random number table 202a per special symbol as random numbers to be determined to be a hit. In the present embodiment, it is set so that all random value values are determined to be hits, but the present invention is not limited to this, and random numbers to be determined to be hits may be set as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 9, the special hit type table 202b is a table for determining the type of big hit to be executed when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the lottery game. In the present embodiment, after the 16R jackpot is executed, the jackpot A in which the time saving game state is set and the jackpot B in which the normal gaming state (non-time saving gaming state) is set after the 16R jackpot is executed are set. ing. If the value of the special hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) acquired when the game ball wins in the first start port 71 or the second start port 300 is "0 to 79", the jackpot A is set ( If it is "80 to 99", the special hit type table 202b is set so that the jackpot B is set (determined).

As shown in FIG. 8C, the random number table 202c per normal symbol stores the random number value of the random number table 202c per normal symbol determined to be a hit in the normal game state (non-time saving game state) and the time saving game state. It is a data table that has been created. In the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state, a random number value determined to be a hit is not set. That is, in the normal game state, it is determined that the values of all the random number counters C4 (0 to 99) per normal symbol acquired based on the winning of the game ball in the normal symbol start port 67 are out of order. Further, in the time-saving game state, all the random number values are set in the random number table 202c per normal symbol as random number values to be determined to be a hit. That is, in the time-saving game state, it is determined that all the values of the random number counters C4 (0 to 99) per normal symbol acquired based on the winning of the game ball in the normal symbol start port 67 are hit.

In the jackpot variation pattern table 202d, a variation display mode (dynamic display mode) that is a hit of a special symbol is stored. In the present embodiment, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 71 and the second starting port 300, all of them are hit and there is no possibility of losing, so only the variation pattern (dynamic display mode) for the big hit is set. ing. In the jackpot variation pattern table 202d, a dedicated jackpot variation pattern is set for each of the winning prizes of the first starting port 71 and the second starting port 300.

As the jackpot fluctuation pattern for winning the first starting port 71, it is selected when the pseudo symbol is variable and displayed in the normal special fluctuation pattern and the ceiling fluctuation pattern which are selected when the pseudo symbol is stopped. The switching special fluctuation pattern selected when the pseudo symbol is variablely displayed in the pseudo fluctuation pattern other than the ceiling special fluctuation pattern and the ceiling fluctuation pattern is set respectively.

As a jackpot fluctuation pattern for winning a prize in the second starting port 300, a time saving special fluctuation pattern is set. The time-saving special fluctuation pattern is composed of a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds, and is configured to notify that a big hit is suddenly displayed in a state where predetermined symbols (for example, "777") are aligned. It has become. With this configuration, the game time in the time-saving game state can be shortened, and the player can prevent the player from getting bored with the game early because the jackpots occur at short intervals. Further, on the game store side, it is possible to shorten the time during the time-saving game in which the game ball is not consumed, and it is possible to increase the sales.

The variation pattern table (ordinary symbol) 202e is a variation pattern table in which the variation display mode (variation time) of the ordinary symbol is stored. When the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started in the second symbol display device 83 provided in the variable display device unit 80, which will be described later, and "○" and "×" are displayed. After the symbols of are alternately lit for a predetermined time (3 seconds in the present embodiment), the normal symbols (in the present embodiment, the symbols of "○" or "×") indicating the lottery result are stopped and displayed (lighted). .. If a ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67 while the variable display is being performed in the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is the number of reserved balls 37. Is displayed by.

In the present embodiment, two types of variation patterns of the normal symbol, a hit variation pattern and a miss variation pattern, are set in the variation pattern table (ordinary symbol) 202e. Both the hit fluctuation pattern and the miss fluctuation pattern are set with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds. As described above, since the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is composed of a short fluctuation time, the time saving game state can be further shortened. Therefore, the player can efficiently use the game time to perform more lottery games. In addition, more sales can be made for the amusement store side.

In the stop type command 202f for the normal symbol, the command corresponding to the hit and miss stop types of the normal symbol is stored.

The arrival average number of seconds data 202g is the average number of seconds data calculated at the time of designing the time required from when the game ball enters the ball entry port 640 of the distribution winning device 64 to when the game ball enters the first start port 71. It is remembered. In the present embodiment, the average number of seconds reached is stored as "5 seconds to 7 seconds".

Further, in the present embodiment, the average number of seconds reached is set in advance based on the design value, but the present invention is not limited to this. A game ball may be entered from the ball opening 640, and the average number of seconds reached may be set based on the time required for entering the ball, or the first starting opening 71 is won each time. The number of seconds reached may be measured and the average number of seconds may be updated every time. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set an accurate number of arrival seconds even when the number of arrival seconds differs for each gaming machine due to the difference in accuracy of the members constituting the distribution winning device 64. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately identify whether or not fraud has been committed.

Further, as described above, when the average arrival time is measured and set for each pachinko machine 10, the fluctuation time of the pseudo-ceiling fluctuation pattern is based on the measured and set average arrival time. Etc. may be set. With this configuration, it is possible to smoothly and naturally switch from the pseudo symbol to the special symbol, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game balls discharged from the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8 of the distribution winning device 64 flow down the upper surface of the game board 13 and are discharged from the out port 66. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a common guide path through which the game balls discharged from the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8 flow down may be provided to guide the game balls to the general winning openings. When a game ball enters the general winning opening, for example, a prize ball such as three balls may be paid out to the player. With this configuration, the third symbol display device 81 can produce whether the game ball that has entered the entry port 640 enters the general winning opening or the first starting opening 71. It is possible to improve the taste of the game. In addition, by winning a prize in the general winning opening and paying out the winning ball, the base of the pachinko machine 10 (the difference between the launched game ball and the paid out game ball) until the winning in the first starting port 71 is played. It can be adjusted so that it does not become too disadvantageous to the player (the investment amount of the player becomes too large).

The distribution initial position data 202h stores the respective initial positions of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8. As the initial position here, the positions where the first to eighth taxiing rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 guide the game ball to the first to eighth discharge guide paths 64z1 to 64z15 are stored. The distribution initial position data 202h is the distribution winning device 64 in the distribution position initialization process (FIG. 25, S1015) executed in the start-up process (FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power is turned on. Is used for initial setting.

The distribution accessory position data 202i corresponds to the number of game balls entered into the entry port 640 of the distribution winning device 64 (value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e), and the first to eighth distributions are performed. The positions of the rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 (the positions where the first accommodating portions 64c1 to 64c8 are facing upward or the positions where the second accommodating portions 64d1 to 64d8 are facing upward) are stored respectively.

Specifically, if the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e is 0 (a state in which 0 or 256 game balls are entered in the distribution winning device 64), the first distribution rotating member 64a1 is the first. 1 "1" indicating that the accommodating portion 64c1 is facing upward, "0" indicating that the second accommodating portion 64d2 of the second distribution rotating member 64a2 is facing upward, the first "1" indicating that the first accommodating portion 64c3 of the three distribution rotating members 64a3 is facing upward, and the position where the second accommodating portion 64d4 of the fourth distribution rotating member 64a4 is facing upward. "0" indicating that, "1" indicating that the first accommodating portion 64c5 of the fifth distribution rotating member 64a5 is facing upward, and the second accommodating portion 64d6 of the sixth distribution rotating member 64a6 "0" indicating that the position is facing upward, "1" indicating that the first accommodating portion 64c7 of the seventh distribution rotating member 64a7 is facing upward, "1" indicating that the position is facing upward, the eighth distribution rotating member. "10101010" is set as continuous data of "0" indicating that the first accommodating portion 64d8 of 64a8 is facing upward. This "10101010" is set in the distribution initial position data 202h described above.

If the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e is 1 (a state in which one game ball is inserted in the distribution winning device 64), the second accommodating portion 64d1 of the first distribution rotating member 64a1 faces upward. Since it moves to the position, "00101010" changed to "0" indicating that the second accommodating portion 64d1 of the first distribution rotating member 64a1 is facing upward is set.

In this way, in the distribution accessory position data 202i, the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 at the time when the game ball enters the ball entry port 640 of the distribution winning device 64 are converted into data. It is stored as a data table. In the distribution winning object position data 202i, the value of the distribution winning ball number counter 203e is "0 to 255" (0 to 255 balls are inserted in the distribution winning device 64 (256 balls are 0). It is set according to each value up to)).

The positions of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 are detected by the output value of the distribution position confirmation sensor 262. The distribution position confirmation sensor 262 is an angle sensor that detects the rotation angle of each of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8. The positions of the magnets 64b1 to b8 facing vertically upward in the gaming machine are set to 0 degrees, and if they are rotated to the right, they will have a positive value, and if they rotate to the left, they will have a negative value. .. Therefore, if the value of the distribution position confirmation sensor 262 is a positive value, it is determined that the first accommodating portions 64c1 to 8 are facing upward (the data of the distribution accessory position data 202i is "1". To be judged). On the other hand, if the value of the distribution position confirmation sensor 262 is a negative value, it is determined that the second accommodating portions 64d1 to 8 are facing upward (the data of the distribution accessory position data 202i is "0"). To be judged).

In the ceiling arrival number data 202j, the value of the distribution winning ball number counter 203e from the initial state of the distribution winning device 64 to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 71 is stored. That is, the number of balls entered into the distribution winning device 64 required for the game ball to win is stored in the first starting port 71. The ceiling arrival number data 202j is provided to recognize the value of the distribution winning ball number counter 203e required for the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to win a prize in the first starting port 71. In the present embodiment, when 256 game balls are entered in the distribution winning device 64, the 256th game ball wins the first starting port 71, that is, the distribution winning ball number counter 203e is 255. Since it is the case where 1 is added from and updated to 0, the value of the distribution winning ball number counter 203e is 0 (excluding 0 set by initialization) in the ceiling arrival number data 202j. It is set. That is, the value obtained by adding 1 from 255 to the distribution winning ball number counter 203e and updating it to 0 corresponds to the ceiling arrival number data 202j.

In the present embodiment, the number of times the ceiling is reached 202j is set in advance, but when the distribution winning ball number counter 203e is updated to 0 by adding 1 from 255, the 256th distribution is distributed. A ceiling arrival flag indicating that the ball has entered the winning device 64 may be set and set to ON.

Next, with reference to FIG. 7, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like use the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, drawing the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

The jackpot lottery and the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 include a special hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a special hit type counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot symbol. , The initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1 is used. Further, the random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and some counters are not displayed in the main process (S1200) (see FIG. 27). It is updated periodically, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol execution area 203a in which each counter value is stored for winning a prize for the first start port 71 or the second start port 300. Further, when the special symbol is changing, only the prize balls (three game balls in this embodiment) are treated as invalid balls paid out to the player without acquiring each counter value or the like.

In the present embodiment, the winning ball of the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300 is not set as a holding ball when the winning is made while the special symbol is changing, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The number of reserved balls may be set regardless of whether there is an upper limit or not.

Each counter shown in FIG. 7 will be described in detail. The random number counter C1 per special symbol is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 109) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 109 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 109). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the random number counter C1 per special symbol makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the random number counter C1 per special symbol.

The initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the random number counter C1 per special symbol. That is, for example, when the random number counter C1 per special symbol is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 109, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 109. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1200) (see FIG. 27).

The value of the random number counter C1 per special symbol is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the ball wins the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300 (starting prize). At the timing of this, the RAM 203 is stored in the special symbol execution area 203c1 corresponding to the winning start port. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot is set by the random number table 202a (FIG. 8B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the random number counter C1 per special symbol is per special symbol. When it matches the value of the random number (“0 to 109” in the present embodiment) which is the big hit set by the random number table 202a, it is determined as a big hit.

The random number counter C1 per special symbol in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 109. In this special symbol per random number counter C1, the number of random number values (winning values) that become big hits is 110, and "0 to 109" is stored in the special symbol per random number table 202a. That is, the value of the random number counter C1 per all special symbols is determined to be a big hit.

The special hit type counter C2 determines the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and is added one by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (99 in the present embodiment). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching. The value of the special hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the ball wins the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300 (starting winning). At the timing of this, it is stored in the special symbol execution area 203a of the RAM 203.

The value of the special hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The jackpot type is determined based on the special hit type counter C2 and the special hit type table 202b (see FIG. 9) stored in the ROM 202. Here, as shown in FIG. 9, as the jackpot type, as described above, the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds, the time-saving game state is set after the jackpot game, and the jackpot A is set, and the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds. There is a "big hit B" in which a normal game state (non-time saving game state) is set after the game.

In the special hit type table 202b, the value of the special hit type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is associated with each jackpot type. As shown in FIG. 9, the value "0 to 79" of the special hit type counter C2 is associated with the jackpot A, and the value "80 to 99" of the special hit type counter C2 is associated with the jackpot B. ing.

When the value of the random number counter C1 per special symbol is a value that becomes a big hit (in this embodiment, all the values are set to the values that become a big hit), the value of the random number counter C1 per special symbol is stored. The jackpot type associated with the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the special symbol execution area 203a is determined from the special hit type table 202b. For example, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is "20", the jackpot A is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is "80", the jackpot B is determined as the jackpot type. ..

As described above, in the present embodiment, the special hit type table 202b is defined so that the jackpot A is selected with a probability of about 80% and the jackpot B is selected with a probability of 20% in the case of a jackpot. There is.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description of various counters will be continued. The random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, reaches the maximum value (that is, 99), and then returns to 0. The ball is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (see FIG. 6) of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the ordinary symbol is set by the random number table 202c (FIG. 8 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol. However, when it matches the value of the random number to be the hit set by the random number table 202c per normal symbol, it is determined to be the hit of the normal symbol.

Further, when the random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol makes one round, the value of the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol. In the present embodiment, the value of the random number counter C4 per normal symbol is updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and is acquired when it is detected that the sphere has passed through the normal symbol start port 67 (through gate). NS. The number of random number values determined to be a hit is 0 in the normal game state, that is, in the normal game state (non-time saving game state), the normal symbol is not a hit. Further, in the time-saving game state, the number is 100, and the range is "0 to 99". That is, since it is determined that all random numbers are hit, the game ball normally hits the symbol start port 67. If you pass it, you will definitely win. When it is determined to be a hit, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the blades 300a and 300b of the ordinary electric accessory 64 are used for the time saving game. In the state, the operation of being released for a predetermined time (1 s in the present embodiment) is performed once (in the normal game state, the normal symbols are all off because the hit is not set). The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the normal symbol per random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 99), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (FIG. 27, S1200).

When the game ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67, if the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is not displayed and each counter value based on the reserved ball is not stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the counter value is not stored. It is stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area provided in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Further, when the normal symbol (second symbol) is variablely displayed or the random number value corresponding to the reserved ball stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Is stored in the normal hit random number counter storage area 203b of the corresponding hold number (normal symbol hold 1 to 4) by the random number value acquired from the normal symbol per random number counter C4. When a random number value is stored in each area, the normal symbol flag provided in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is set to on, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol based on the random value is stopped or held. If the data is shifted to the previous hold area by digesting, it is set to off. Here, when the data is shifted, the normal symbol flag of the newly shifted and stored holding area is set to on. Judgment as to whether or not data is stored in the hold area or whether or not the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner is executed depending on which hold area or whether or not the normal symbol flag of the execution area is turned on.

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the values of the counters and the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 7, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, and an I / O. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (S1200) (see FIG. 27) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 24) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 23) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The RAM 203 includes a special symbol execution area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c, a time saving medium counter 203d, a distribution winning ball number counter 203e, a distribution discharging ball number counter 203f, and a distribution winning timer. It has at least 203 g, a distribution winning flag 203h, and other memory area 203i.

The special symbol holding ball execution area 203a is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the special symbol are stored, and when the special symbol is stopped in the variable display, the first start port 71 or the second start port 71 or the second. This is a storage area in which various counter values acquired when a game ball wins a prize in the starting port 300 are stored. Each counter value stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area 203a is cleared (erased) to 0 when the special symbol stops fluctuating.

Specifically, in the special symbol holding ball execution area 203a, each value of the special symbol per random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter C2 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 7) in connection with the detection of the start winning prize is stored. NS. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won the first start port 71 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), the values of the random number counter C1 per special symbol and the special hit type counter C2 are obtained from the counter buffer. Are acquired and stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area 203a, respectively. When the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start the execution of the variation effect (data is stored in the special symbol execution area 203a while the special symbol has stopped changing), the jackpot lottery or the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol Processes such as setting the display of the display device 81 are executed.

When the values of the counters C1 to C3 acquired from the counter buffer are stored in the special symbol execution area 203a, the MPU 201 stores the data stored in the special symbol execution area 203a as a special symbol, which will be described later. It is referred to in the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 16, S204), a jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and a fluctuation pattern and a stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, a variation display effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

Further, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is a storage area in which the random number counter C4 per normal symbol acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 7) is stored when the start winning prize is detected in the normal symbol start port 67. When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 detects that the sphere has passed through the normal symbol start port 67 (starting prize) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), the random number counter C4 per normal symbol is detected from the counter buffer. Is acquired and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. The normal symbol flag provided in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is set to on and stored (stored). The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has four holding areas so that data (counter C4 value, normal symbol flag) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (held) up to four times. .. In the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b, the data of the hold balls are stored in the order of passing through the normal symbol start port 67 (starting prize), in order from the hold area in which the data is vacant, in the order of being digested (earlier hold area). (Holding area corresponding to the number of holding balls) is stored.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation display effect of the normal symbol, the above-mentioned normal symbol is held in order to execute processing such as a winning lottery and a display setting of the second symbol display device 83. Of the data (value of the random number counter C4 per normal hit) stored in the ball storage area 203b corresponding to each start winning, the data corresponding to one start winning is provided in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Shift to the normal symbol hold ball execution area. The shift in the present embodiment means moving the data stored in one area to another area.

The normal symbol hold ball number counter 203c allows the game ball to pass through the normal symbol start port 67 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter, “starting prize”). The number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the variable display effect (variable display effect performed by the second symbol display device 83) performed by the first symbol display device 37 is up to four times, respectively. It is a counter to count. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 67. Zero is set as the initial value by the initial setting process (FIG. 24, S1014) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, every time the starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time the variation display effect is executed (see FIGS. 21, S805).

The time reduction medium counter 203d is a counter area in which the time reduction number 100 is set after the jackpot game of jackpot A is executed. When the number of time reductions is set, the random number table per normal symbol for the time reduction game state is set in the random number table 202c per normal symbol until the number of time reductions is set to 0. Further, when the symbol "○" indicating the hit of the ordinary symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83, the blades 300a and 300b of the ordinary electric accessory are opened in the opening time (1s in the present embodiment). Is executed once.

The time saving medium counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the special symbol fluctuates and stops displaying, and when the value of the time saving medium counter 203d becomes 0, the time saving game state shifts to the normal gaming state, and the random number counter 202c per normal symbol A random number table per normal symbol for the normal game state (non-time saving game state) is set.

The distribution winning ball number counter 203e is a counter in which 1 is added when a game ball wins a prize at the entrance 640 of the distribution winning device 64. In the initialized state of the RAM 203, it is set to 0, and the game ball has passed through the ball entry port 640 in the distribution winning process (FIG. 18, S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later. If it is determined that, 1 is added. When the jackpot game is started, it is initialized to 0.

The distribution discharge ball number counter 203f is a counter in which 1 is added each time the game ball passes through any of the 1st to 8th discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8 of the distribution winning device 64. In the initialized state of the RAM 203, it is set to 0, and in the distribution discharge process (FIGS. 19, S106) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later, the game ball is the first to eighth discharge ports. When it is determined that the product has passed any of 650a1 to 650a8, 1 is added. The distribution discharge ball number counter 203f is initialized based on the start of the jackpot game.

In the present embodiment, the distribution discharge ball number counter 203f is configured to count the number of game balls discharged from the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ball entry port 640a is not limited to this. If a prize is won, 1 may be added, and if the game ball is discharged from any of the 1st to 8th discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8, the count value may be decremented by 1. With this configuration, the number of game balls being won in the distribution winning device 64 can be counted.

In the distribution winning timer 203g, when the game ball passes through the ball entry port 640 of the distribution winning device 64, the value of the distribution winning ball number counter 203e is added to the set counter value (in this embodiment, 255 to 1). If it is 0) updated in the above, it is a timer for measuring the flow time of the game ball. That is, the fact that the value of the distribution winning counter 203e is updated by adding 1 from 255 means that the 256th game ball has entered, so after entering the entrance 640. The time until the ball enters the first starting port 71 is measured.

When the game ball passes through the ball entry port 640 of the distribution winning device 64, the value of the distribution winning timer 203g is set to 0 and the start of measurement is set. In the distribution error processing (FIG. 28, S1207) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, if the distribution winning flag 203h is set to ON, 1 is added. In the state where the RAM 203 is initialized, the distribution winning timer 203g is set to 0.

The distribution winning flag 203h is a flag indicating that the 256th game ball (distribution winning ball number counter 203e) has entered the distribution winning device 64. Specifically, the distribution winning flag 203g is a distribution winning ball when the game ball passes through the ball entry port 640 in the distribution winning process (FIG. 18, S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. When the value of the number counter 203e is the set counter value (in the present embodiment, 0 is updated by adding 1 from 255), that is, the 256th game ball has entered the distribution winning device 64. If set to on. Further, in the start winning process (FIG. 20, S107) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when the game ball enters the first starting port 71, the distribution winning flag 203h is set to off if it is on. Will be done. In the state where the RAM 203 is initialized, the distribution winning flag 203h is set to off.

The other memory area 203i is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

In this way, when it is determined that the 256th game ball, which is the number of game balls to be won in the first start port 71, has entered the ball entry port 640 of the distribution winning device 64, the game ball is the first. Since it is configured to measure the flow time until the 1 start port 71 is won, if the game ball wins the 1st start port 71 in a time longer or shorter than the time expected in advance by the design, fraud will occur. Fraud can be suppressed by determining that there is a possibility that it has been performed and notifying an error or the like.

Further, when it is determined that the number of game balls (256 balls in the present embodiment) to be won in the first starting port 71 has been entered in the distribution winning device 64, the distribution winning flag 203h is turned on. By setting to, it is possible to determine in advance that the first starting port 71 will be won and execute the control, and when the first starting port 71 is won, the distribution winning flag 203h is turned on. If a prize is generated in the first starting port 71 even though the distribution winning flag 203h is off, an error or the like is notified to notify the first starting port 71 due to fraud. It is possible to suppress winning a prize.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is driven to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, and the specific winning opening 65a as an axis. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving a solenoid and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

Further, various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch (FIG. 5, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115 are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is connected to the MPU 201. Various processes are executed based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIG. 5, 122) circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 is an output of voice in a voice output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variable display effect ( It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as (variable display). The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

A pseudo-variation table 222a and a background selection table 222b are set at least in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. Although not shown, the ROM 222 also stores a control program, fixed value data, and the like executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

In the pseudo-variation table 222a, as shown in FIG. 10A, the variation pattern for displaying the pseudo symbol on the third symbol display device 81 in a variable manner is the value of the follow-on distribution winning ball number counter 223d and the pseudo-variation selection counter 223a. Each is stored in correspondence with the value of. As the types of fluctuation patterns, a normal deviation fluctuation pattern, a normal reach fluctuation pattern, a super reach A fluctuation pattern, a super reach B fluctuation pattern, a precursor fluctuation pattern, and a ceiling fluctuation pattern are set.

In the normal deviation variation pattern, three numerical symbols 1 to 9 which are one of the pseudo symbols are arranged in a line on the left, middle, and right and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in ascending order for a predetermined time (for example, 2). After the variable display at high speed during (seconds), the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are stopped and displayed in the order of different numbers (for example, "456"). The fluctuation time from the start of fluctuation to the stop display of all pseudo symbols is composed of 3 seconds.

In the normal reach fluctuation pattern, three numerical symbols 1 to 9, which are one of the pseudo symbols, are displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right on the third symbol display device 81, and are displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). After the pseudo symbols are displayed in ascending order at high speed, the left symbol and the right symbol stop fluctuating with the same number (for example, "7"), and then the voice "reach" is output from the audio output device 226 to reach the reach state. After, the middle symbol is slow and fluctuates in ascending order. After that, a symbol different from the left and right symbols (for example, "757") is stopped and displayed. The fluctuation time from the start of the fluctuation display to the stop display of all the pseudo symbols is composed of 10 seconds.

In the super reach A fluctuation pattern, three numerical symbols 1 to 9 which are one of the pseudo symbols are arranged on the left, middle, and right and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). In the meantime, after the pseudo symbols are displayed in ascending order at high speed, the left symbol and the right symbol stop fluctuating with the same number (for example, "7"), and then the voice "reach" is output from the audio output device 226. After reaching the reach state, a character different from the pseudo pattern of numbers (for example, a girl in a swimsuit with a polka dot pattern) is displayed. Along with the character, the number symbol of the middle symbol is also displayed in a fluctuating manner at a low speed, and the girl acts to stop the number symbol and stops it at a number symbol different from the left and right symbols (for example, "757"). The fluctuation time from the start of the variable display of the numerical symbols to the stop display of all the numerical symbols is composed of 15 seconds.

The super reach B fluctuation pattern differs from the super reach A fluctuation pattern in the swimsuit of the girl who is the displayed character. Specifically, a girl in a red swimsuit is displayed. Regarding other points, the same variable display as in Super Reach A is performed.

As for the precursory reach fluctuation pattern, three numerical symbols 1 to 9, which are one of the pseudo symbols, are displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right on the third symbol display device 81, and are displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). After the pseudo symbols are displayed in ascending order at high speed, the left symbol and the right symbol stop fluctuating with the same number (for example, "7"), and then the voice "reach" is output from the audio output device 226 to reach. After the state is reached, the words "A little more to heaven!" Are displayed. The middle symbol is slow and fluctuates in ascending order. After that, a symbol different from the left and right symbols (for example, "757") is stopped and displayed. The fluctuation time from the start of the fluctuation display to the stop display of all the pseudo symbols is composed of 20 seconds. In this way, by displaying the characters "a little more to the heavens!", The player can win the number of game balls entered in the distribution winning device 64 in the first starting port 71. You can recognize that you are approaching.

Since this precursor fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern selected only when the value of the follow-up winning ball counter 223d is "201-254", the value of the follow-up winning ball counter 223d of the player. It is also a fluctuation pattern that notifies (range of values).

As for the ceiling fluctuation pattern, three numerical symbols 1 to 9, which are one of the pseudo symbols, are arranged in a horizontal row on the left, middle, and right, and are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). During the period, after the pseudo symbols are displayed in ascending order at high speed, the left symbol and the right symbol stop fluctuating with the same number (for example, "7"), and then the voice "reach" is output from the audio output device 226. After the reach state is reached, as shown in the upper figure of FIG. 11B, the three numerical symbols are reduced and displayed on the upper left of the third symbol display device 81, and a picture of the closed door is displayed. .. It is composed of a fluctuation time of 6 seconds until the picture of the closed door is displayed, and the middle symbol is in a state of variable display at high speed as it is.

The ceiling fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern selected when the value of the follow-up winning ball number counter 223d is 255, and is selected when a game ball is to be won in the first starting port 71. That is, the ceiling fluctuation pattern is configured in a fluctuation mode that is connected to the fluctuation of the special symbol. Therefore, in order to link with the fluctuation of the special symbol, the average time required from the game ball passing through the ball entry port 640 of the distribution winning device 64 to winning the first starting port 71 is 5 seconds to 7 It consists of a variation time of 6 seconds, which is within the range of seconds. As a result, when the game ball wins the first starting port 71, it is possible to smoothly switch to the variable display of the special symbol, and it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of discomfort. Further, by setting the intermediate time of the average time, the switching can be performed more smoothly.

In the present embodiment, when the value of the follow-up winning ball number counter 223d becomes large, it is usually difficult to select the out-of-order fluctuation pattern (the number of values assigned to the pseudo fluctuation selection counter 223a is small). There is. Further, when the value of the follow-up winning ball number counter 223d is large (for example, "201-254"), the super reach A fluctuation pattern is easily selected (the number of values assigned to the pseudo fluctuation selection counter 223a is large). ) Is configured. As a result, when the frequency of displaying the Super Reach A fluctuation pattern increases, the number of game balls that have won the distribution winning device 64 may be close to the number that will win the first starting port 71. Can be expected from others. Further, since it is not known what the state of the distribution winning device 64 (positions of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8) is when the game is started, the player enters the first start port 71. I am interested in how much a game ball must be won in the entrance 640 of the distribution winning device 64 before winning a prize. Here, the selection rate is changed in relation to the number of game balls that have entered the distribution winning device 64 (the value of the follow-up distribution winning ball counter 223d) for the types of fluctuation patterns that are variablely displayed in the pseudo pattern. Therefore, it is possible to make the player predict the number of balls to be entered in the current distribution winning device 64. Therefore, the player can be interested in the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo symbol that is selected regardless of the determination of the jackpot, and can suppress getting bored with the game.

As shown in FIG. 10B, the background selection table 222b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in relation to the value of the follow-up distribution winning ball number counter 223d and the value of the pseudo-variation selection counter 223a. A plurality of background images are set respectively. As the type of the background image, a normal background, a precursor A background, a precursor B background, and a precursor C background are set.

The normal background is a blue background image (not shown). As shown in FIG. 13 (c), the precursor A background is a background image showing "sunny" with a sun pattern displayed in the upper right on a normal blue background. As shown in FIG. 13D, the precursor B background is a background image showing “cloudiness” in which white clouds are displayed on a normal blue background. As shown in FIG. 13 (e), the precursor C background is a background image showing a "storm" in which a black rain cloud is displayed on a normal blue background and rain is displayed from the rain cloud.

As the value of the follow-up winning ball number counter 223d increases, the proportion of the precursor A background selected decreases, and the proportion of the precursor B background and the precursor C background selected increases. When the value of the follow-up winning ball number counter 223d is 255 (that is, the number of winning balls (256 in this embodiment) that will win the first starting port 71 in the distribution winning device 64). In the case of entering the ball), the precursor C background is selected regardless of the value of the pseudo-variation selection counter 223a.

Specifically, when the value of the follow-up winning ball number counter 223d is "0 to 60", of the 199 values of the pseudo selection counter 223a, 30 are precursor A backgrounds and 19 are precursors. B background, 9 are assigned to precursor C background. Similarly, when the value of the follow-up winning ball number counter 223d is "61 to 149", 25 are assigned to the precursor A background, 24 are assigned to the precursor B background, and 9 are assigned to the precursor C background. When the value of the follow-up winning ball number counter 223d is "150 to 200", 10 are assigned to the precursor A background, 29 are assigned to the precursor B background, and 19 are assigned to the precursor C background. When the value of the follow-up winning ball number counter 223d is "201-254", 6 are assigned to the precursor A background, 33 are assigned to the precursor B background, and 29 are assigned to the precursor C background.

In this way, when the value approaches "255", which is the value of the follow-up winning ball number counter 223a indicating the number of winning balls to be won in the first starting port 71, the precursor B background and the precursor C background are selected. The ratio to be done is set a lot. Further, in the case of "255" which is the value of the follow-up winning ball number counter 223a indicating the number of winning balls to be won in the first starting port 71, the precursor C background is selected, so that the first When the game ball wins the starting port 71, the precursor C background is often displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player will play the game with the expectation that the first starting port 71 will win a prize when the precursor C background is displayed.

Further, when the precursor B background or the precursor C background is selected and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can see that the number of game balls that have entered the distribution winning device 64 is displayed in the first starting port 71. The game can be played with the expectation that the number of winning balls (256 in the present embodiment) will be close to the winning number. Further, since the selection ratio of the background type selected is changed according to the number of balls entered in the distribution winning device 64, the number of balls entered in the current distribution device 64 depends on the type of the selected background image. Can provide the enjoyment that the player predicts. Therefore, even if the number of balls entered into the distribution winning device 64 is actually 50, when the precursor C background is selected and displayed, the player does not have the number of balls entered close to 256. You can continue the game with the expectation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

The selection of the background image will be described later, but in the background selection process (FIGS. 35, S1613) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, the number of balls (remaining) in the distribution winning device 64 is determined. When the value of the winning counter 223f shown is larger than 3, the background image is selected, and the background image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed to the selected background image.

The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with at least a pseudo fluctuation selection counter 223a, a fluctuation start flag 223b, a stop type selection flag 223c, a follow-up distribution discharge ball number counter 223e, a follow-up winning counter 223f, and other memory areas 223g. ing.

The pseudo-variation selection counter 223a is a counter used when selecting a variation pattern of a pseudo-symbol from the pseudo-variation table 222a or when selecting a background image from the background selection table 222b. The pseudo-variation selection counter 223a is a counter value composed of values in the range of 0 to 198, and is added and updated one by one in the main process (FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. When 1 is added to the upper limit value "198", it is updated to the initial value 0. When the power is turned on, it is set to 0, which is the initial value.

The fluctuation start flag 223b is a flag indicating that a fluctuation pattern command of a special symbol has been received from the main controller 110. When the power is turned on, it is set to off, and it is determined that the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 has been received in the command determination process (FIG. 31, S1614) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. If so, it will be set to on. Further, it is set to off in the variation display setting process (FIG. 33, S1611) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The stop type selection flag 223c is a flag indicating that the stop type command output by the main control device 110 has been received. When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, it is set to off. When it is determined that the stop type command output from the main control device 110 has been received in the command determination process (FIG. 31, S1614) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, the stop type selection flag 223c is turned on. Set. Further, it is set to off in the variation display setting process (FIG. 33, S1611) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The follow-up winning ball number counter 223d is a counter indicating the number of game balls that have entered the distribution winning device 64. When the follow-up winning ball number counter 223d receives the distribution winning ball number command output from the main control device 110, it is updated to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value indicated by the command. Here, if the distribution winning ball number command is a value indicating 0, the value obtained by subtracting 1 is 255. That is, the value "0 to 255" of the follow-up winning ball number counter 223d corresponds to 1 to 256 game balls entered in the distribution winning device 64, respectively (follow-up winning ball number counter 223d). The value of 0 corresponds to one). When the power is turned on to the game machine, it is set to 0, and the number of distribution winning balls output by the main control device 110 in the command determination process (FIG. 31, S1614) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. By receiving the command, the value is set to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the distribution winning ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. The various data stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 are backed up by the backup power supply for a predetermined period when the power supply is cut off.

The follow-up distribution discharge ball number counter 223e is a counter that indicates the number of game balls ejected from the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8 by the game balls that have entered the distribution winning device 64. When the follow-up distribution discharge ball number counter 223e receives the distribution discharge ball number command output from the main control device 110, it is updated to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value indicated by the command. Here, when the distribution discharge number command is a command indicating 0, it becomes 255 when 1 is subtracted. That is, the value "0 to 255" of the follow-up distribution discharge ball counter 223e corresponds to 1 to 256 game balls discharged from the distribution winning device 64, respectively (the distribution discharge ball counter 223e). A value of 0 corresponds to one). When the power is turned on to the game machine, it is set to 0, and the number of distribution discharge balls output by the main control device 110 in the command determination process (FIG. 31, S1614) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. By receiving the command, the value is set to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the distribution discharge ball counter 203f stored in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

The subordinate winning counter 223f is a counter indicating the number of game balls that have entered (remained) in the distribution winning device 64. When the command determination process (FIG. 31, S1614) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 receives the distribution winning ball number command output by the main control device 110, the winning counter 223f is incremented by 1 and shaken. When the minute discharge ball number command is received, 1 is subtracted. Therefore, if there are game balls that have entered the distribution winning device 64, the counter value indicates the number of the game balls, and if there are no game balls in the distribution winning device 64, the counter value is 0. There is. The value of the winning counter 223f is used when determining whether or not to change the background in the background selection process (FIG. 35, S1613) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter 223f is 4 or more (a value larger than 3), and if it is 4 or more, the process of changing the background is executed.

The other memory area 223g is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch (FIGS. 5, 122). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power cutoff, power supply cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 backs up to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch (FIG. 5, 122) is pressed when the power is turned on (power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIGS. 5, 122)). This is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the data. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 detects the winning of a special symbol or a normal symbol, and executes control processing such as various lottery such as selection of a winning or fluctuating pattern for the winning. Therefore, the control load of the MPU 201 is large, and in order to stably control the pachinko machine 10, the lottery for whether or not to set the game operation suggestion setting as in the present embodiment is sub-controlled. The control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced by performing the operation by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 corresponding to the device.

The control board of the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 is covered with a box (box) composed of a transparent plastic base member and a lid member called a board box. The substrate box is crimped by a member for preventing fraud called a "sealing member" so that the base member and the lid member cannot be easily separated from each other. Generally, when the base member and the lid member are fitted to each other, the sealing member inserts a pin-shaped sealing member into a through hole provided through a part of the base member and the lid member (or By doing so, it is difficult to separate the base member and the lid member only by a method that leaves an opening mark, such as destroying the member forming the through hole or destroying the sealing member. ..

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 14 to 35. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process (FIG. 24) that is started when the power is turned on, a main process (FIG. 27, S1200) that is executed after the start-up process, and periodically (the present embodiment). Then, there are a timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) that is activated (at a cycle of 2 milliseconds) and an NMI interrupt process (FIG. 23) that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. The timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the start-up process (FIG. 24) and the main process (FIG. 27, S1200) will be described.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process that is repeatedly executed every 2 milliseconds. When the MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt process, various processes to be executed periodically are performed.

In this timer interrupt process, first, the process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. Further, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 based on the prize detection information is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. As a result, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process executed next.

Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, when the initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1 and the counter value is added by 1 to the upper limit value (109 in the present embodiment), the value is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, when the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1 and the counter value is added by 1 to the upper limit value (99 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the random number counter C1 per special symbol, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol are updated (S103). Specifically, the random number counter C1 per special symbol, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment, respectively). , 109, 99, 100, 99), and when 1 is added, it is cleared to 0, respectively. When the random number counter C1 per special symbol or the random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 or the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is changed to the random number counter C1 per special symbol or ordinary. It is read as an initial value of the random number counter C4 per symbol, and the initial value is set in the random number counter C1 per special symbol or the random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a process for displaying the special symbol by the first symbol display device 37 and a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the special symbol (third symbol) by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S104). ). Next, the distribution winning process associated with the entry of the ball into the distribution winning device 64 is executed (S105), and the distribution discharge process associated with the discharge of the game ball from the distribution winning device 64 is executed (S106). Next, the start winning process associated with winning the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300 is executed (S107). The details of the special symbol variation processing (S104) will be described later with reference to FIG. 15, the details of the distribution winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIG. 18, and the details of the distribution discharge processing (S106) will be described. The details of the start winning process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIG. 19 and will be described later with reference to FIG. 20.

After the start winning process (S107) is executed, the normal symbol variation process (S108), which is the variation process of the normal symbol for the game ball passing through the normal symbol start port 67, is executed (S108), and then the normal symbol start port 67 is executed. (S109), the through gate processing is executed for the fact that the game ball has passed. The details of the normal symbol variation processing (S108) will be described later with reference to FIG. 21, and the details of the through gate processing (S109) will be described later with reference to FIG. 22. The launch control process for executing the control related to the launch of the game ball is executed (S110), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S111), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The firing control process (S110) detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. It is a process to determine whether to turn on / off the firing. Then, when the ball launch is on, the information of the ball launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203 in order to transmit the ball launch signal to the launch control device 112. As a result, the ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process that is executed next.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15, a special symbol variation process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). The special symbol variation processing (FIGS. 15, S104) makes various determinations and decisions based on the counter values obtained from the special symbols, and the first symbol display device 37 is in the determined variation display mode by predetermined control. And the third symbol display device 81 simultaneously control the variable display (dynamic display), or stop the display in the display mode (dynamic display mode) showing the determination result. Hereinafter, the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 15, S104) will be described.

In the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 15, S104), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is in progress (S201). If it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S201: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is not hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S202).

When it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (S202, No), it is determined whether new data is stored in the special symbol execution area 203a (S203). If it is determined that no new data is stored in the special symbol execution area 203a (S203: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that new data is stored in the special symbol execution area 203a (S203: Yes), the special symbol variation start processing is executed (S204). After that, this process ends.

The special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S204) will be described in detail later, but the jackpot determination and the variation pattern selection process are executed based on various data newly stored in the special symbol execution area 203a.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S202: Yes), the special symbol is set to a variable display (dynamic display mode) in which the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (dynamic display mode). It is determined whether the fluctuation time has elapsed (S205). If it is determined that it is before the fluctuation time (S205: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S104: Yes), the stop display of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S206).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result this time was a big hit (S207). If it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is out of order (S207: No), this process ends. In addition, in this embodiment, since all the fluctuations of the special symbol are big hits, the process of determining whether or not the special symbol is a big hit may be omitted.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result this time is a jackpot (S207: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (S208). Here, the determination of the jackpot type is determined by the special hit type table 202b shown in FIG. 9 based on the acquired value of the special hit type counter C2. If it is determined that the jackpot is A, 100 is set in the time saving / medium counter 203d (S209). On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot is B, 0 is set in the time saving / medium counter 203d (S210). Various settings (for example, the number of rounds) related to the start of the jackpot game are set (S211). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16, a special symbol variation start process (S204), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S104), will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing this special symbol change start processing (S204).

In the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S204), first, the sorting device error notification control process is executed (S301). The details of the distribution device error notification control process (S301) will be described later with reference to FIG. 17, but based on the value of the current distribution winning ball number counter 203e, the first to first distribution winning devices 64 The positions of the eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 are determined, the positions are collated with the values of the distribution winning ball number counter 203e, and if it is determined that they do not match, error notification processing is executed. It is a process to do.

The data stored in the special symbol execution area 203a is acquired (S302). Based on the random number table 202a per special symbol, the jackpot determination is executed for the value of the acquired random number counter C1 per special symbol (S303). It is determined whether or not the result of the hit / miss determination executed in the process of S303 is a big hit (S304). When it is determined that the determination result is a big hit (S304: YES), the display mode (LED display mode) in the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the big hit is set (S305). A jackpot fluctuation pattern for variable display of the special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is selected (determined) (S306).

Here, as the jackpot fluctuation pattern, as the jackpot fluctuation pattern selected based on winning the first starting port 71, a normal special fluctuation pattern and a ceiling fluctuation pattern selected when the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed are displayed. The ceiling special fluctuation pattern selected when the pseudo symbol is variablely displayed in, and the switching special fluctuation pattern selected when the pseudo symbol is variablely displayed in a fluctuation pattern other than the ceiling fluctuation pattern are set. Further, as a variation pattern selected based on winning a prize in the second starting port 300, a time saving special variation pattern is set.

In the normal special variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 11A, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 71 when the pseudo symbol is not in the variation display, the left, middle, and right symbols (in the present embodiment). , Numbers 1 to 9) are looped (1 → 2 → ... → 9 → 1), and the variable display is started at high speed in ascending order. Then, as shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 11A, the same symbol is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, the reach state is reached, and only the middle symbol is fluctuated and displayed at a low speed. In the reach state, the voice "reach" is output from the voice output device 226. After that, as shown in FIG. 11A, the characters "reached the heavens !!" are displayed below the area where the special symbol of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed, and the player has 256 balls. Enters the distribution winning device 64, and a notification indicating that the game ball has won is displayed at the first starting port 71. After that, for example, the special symbol is stopped and displayed at "777", and is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the player has hit the jackpot. In the present embodiment, if the game ball wins the first starting port 71, it is a gaming machine that always wins a big hit. Therefore, the player recognizes that if the first starting opening 71 wins a prize, the game machine wins a big hit. .. Therefore, the player directly connects to the jackpot that the number of balls (256 balls in the present embodiment) that the game balls will win in the first starting port 71 enters the distribution winning device 64. I understand and play games. Therefore, by displaying the characters "reaching the heavens !!", it is understood that the number of game balls required to win the first starting port 71 in the distribution winning device 64 has been entered at an early stage. It can be recognized that it will be a big hit. The fluctuation time of the special fluctuation pattern is usually set to 15 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 11B, the ceiling variation pattern is a pseudo-symbol ceiling variation pattern when a game ball wins a prize at the first starting port 71 and the variation display of the special symbol is started in the ceiling special variation pattern. The pseudo symbol displayed in the upper left is replaced as a special symbol as it is, and the closed door is opened. After that, as shown in the lower figure of FIG. 11B, the special symbol displayed in the upper left in the reach state is displayed in the center of the third symbol display device 81, and the "heavenly world reached !!" is displayed below the special symbol. The characters are displayed. After that, the special symbol is stopped and displayed at "777", and is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode for notifying that a big hit has been made. The ceiling special fluctuation pattern is set with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds.

The ceiling fluctuation pattern is the same as the time (time set at the time of design) from when the game ball enters the ball entry port 640 of the distribution winning device 64 to when the game ball enters the first starting port 71. The fluctuation time is set. Therefore, since the game ball wins the first starting port 71 at the end of the fluctuation time after the fluctuation display of the ceiling fluctuation pattern is started, the replacement with the special symbol is smoothly performed. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling unnatural. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish whether it is a variation of the pseudo symbol or a variation of the special symbol, and even if the variation display of the pseudo symbol is displayed, the player can have an expectation for a big hit.

As shown in FIG. 12, the switching special fluctuation pattern is shown in the middle diagram of FIG. 12 when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 71 when the pseudo symbol is variablely displayed in a fluctuation pattern other than the ceiling fluctuation pattern. As shown, the pseudo pattern that was displayed in a variable manner disappears, and the black screen is displayed for a moment. After that, the same special symbols on the left and right are displayed in the "reach state" where they are stopped and displayed, and the characters "reached the heavens !!" are displayed. After that, a stop display is displayed with a special symbol of "777", and the player is notified that a big hit has been made. The switching special fluctuation pattern is set with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds.

Therefore, the player can produce a big hit even if the closed door displayed in the ceiling fluctuation pattern is not displayed, and the player has an expectation for the big hit even if the ceiling fluctuation pattern is not displayed. Can be made. In addition, by displaying the black screen for a moment at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, it is possible to give a fresh taste, and it is possible to pay attention to the subsequent fluctuation of the special symbol.

The time-saving special fluctuation pattern is composed of a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds, and is configured to notify that a big hit is suddenly displayed in a state where predetermined symbols (for example, "777") are aligned. It has become. With this configuration, the game time in the time-saving game state can be shortened, and the player can prevent the player from getting bored with the game early because the jackpots occur at short intervals. Further, on the game store side, it is possible to shorten the time during the time-saving game in which the game ball is not consumed, and it is possible to increase the sales.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit / fail determination result in the process of S303 is incorrect (S304: No), the determination error notification command is set (S307). In the present embodiment, since the configuration is such that the value of the random number counter C1 per special symbol is determined to be a hit, if it is determined to be out of order, the gaming machine is illegally modified or the gaming machine is determined to be out of order. Since it is possible that the machine is out of order, it is possible to notify the game store of the abnormality of the gaming machine by setting the determination error notification command. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the determination error notification command, error processing is executed so that the third symbol display device 81 displays an error (for example, characters such as "determination error").

A variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern of the selected special symbol is generated (S308). The stop type command is set (S309). In the present embodiment, only the jackpot stop type command is set as the stop type command.

Next, the sorting device error notification control process (S301), which is one of the special symbol variation start processes (FIG. 16, S204), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the distribution device error notification control process (S301).

From the position of the first distribution rotating member 64a1 and the value of the distribution winning ball number counter 203e, it is collated whether the data is the same as the data set in the distribution accessory position data 202i (S401). Here, the data set in the distribution accessory position data 202i is collated with the data corresponding to the three values before and after the value of the distribution winning ball number counter 203e, and a process of collating whether the data is the same as any of them is performed. Run. As a result, if there is a game ball remaining in the distribution winning device 64 (flowing down in the distribution winning device 64), the remaining game ball of the distribution rotating member 64a1 is moved. Even in that case, the position data of the first distribution rotating member 64a1 in the distribution accessory position data 202i corresponding to the front and rear three times is determined from the value of the distribution winning ball number counter 203e. Therefore, even in a normal game (a game in which fraud is not performed), it is possible to suppress a problem of notifying an error.

If it is determined that the collation results do not match (S401: No), an error notification command is set (S408). When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error notification command, the display error notification command is set to display an error on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, display the characters "character position error"). On the other hand, if it is determined that the collation results match (S401: No), the process of S402 is executed. In each of the processes S402 to S408, similarly to the process of S401, a collation process is executed to see if there is an abnormality in the positions of the second to eighth distribution rotation members 64a2 to 64a8. Since the collation process is the same method as that of the first distribution rotating member 64a1, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, when the game ball wins a prize in the first start port 71 or the second start port 300, the distribution device error notification control process (FIG. 17, S301) is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. , It may be configured to execute only when the first starting port 71 is won. With this configuration, when the second starting port 300 is won, the control process can be reduced, and the control load of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, the processing of collating the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 is executed, but only the position of the eighth distribution rotation member 64a8 is checked by the distribution winning ball number counter 203e. Check whether the value is the same as the data corresponding to the distribution accessory position data 202i corresponding to 0 (in the present embodiment, "0" indicating that the second accommodating portion 64d8 is facing upward). It may be configured.

With this configuration, after guiding the game ball to the first starting port 71 (8th guide path 64z16), the second accommodating portion 64d8 is in a state of facing upward. By collating only the state, it can be easily determined whether or not the game ball is normally guided to the first starting port 71 via the eighth taxiing rotating member 64a8. Further, even if there is a game ball that has subsequently won a prize in the distribution winning device 64, it is necessary to enter a large number of game balls before the game ball reaches the eighth distribution rotation member 64a8, so that the eighth ball is required. The position of the distribution rotation member 64a8 can be determined and determined. Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine whether or not fraud has been performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the collation does not match, the error notification process is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a process for invalidating the jackpot may be executed, or the error notification may be notified by voice or the like. However, it may be configured to output a signal to a hall computer or the like so that the player cannot identify it. With this configuration, the game store can recognize and respond to the notification of fraud earlier. Therefore, the damage caused by fraud can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 are detected one by one, but the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 are determined. "10101010" which is configured to detect at one time and indicates the detected data (normally, the positions of the 1st to 8th distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 when 256 game balls enter. ) And the position data corresponding to 0 (256) of the distribution initial position data 202h or the distribution accessory position data 202i. With this configuration, it is possible to more easily collate whether the position is normal.

Next, the distribution winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing this distribution winning process (S105). In this distribution winning process (FIG. 18, S105), the number of winning balls entered into the distribution winning device 64 is counted, and the number of winning balls is notified to the voice lamp control device 113. The process for generating the distribution winning ball number command is executed. Hereinafter, the distribution winning process (FIG. 18, S105) will be described.

In the distribution winning process (FIG. 18, S105), first, it is determined that the game ball has entered the ball entry port 640 of the distribution winning device 64 (S501). When it is determined that a game ball has entered the ball entry port 640 (S501: Yes), the value of the distribution winning ball number counter 203e is acquired (S502). 1 is added to the value of the acquired distribution winning ball number counter 203e to update the value, and the updated value is stored in the distribution winning ball number counter 203e (S503). When the value of the acquired distribution winning ball number counter 203e is the upper limit value 255, adding 1 updates the value to 0, which is the initial value. Set (generate) the distribution winning ball number command indicating the value of the updated distribution winning ball number counter 203e (S504). On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the ball entry port 640 (S501: No), this process ends.

It is determined whether the value of the updated distribution winning ball number counter 203e is the set counter value (in the present embodiment, 0 is updated by adding 1 from 255) (S505). That is, it is determined whether the game ball that has entered the ball entry port 640 is a game ball that will win a prize in the first start port 71. When it is determined that the value is the setting counter value (S505: Yes), the value of the distribution winning timer 203g is set to 0. That is, the measurement start is set as the time from when the game ball that will enter the first start port 71 enters the entry port 640 until the game ball enters the first start port 71. The distribution winning flag 203h is set to on (S507). After that, this process ends.

With this configuration, the number of game balls entered in the distribution winning device 64 is accurately determined by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The number of balls can be recognized, and an effect or the like based on the number of game balls that have won a prize in the distribution winning device 64 can be executed.

Next, the distribution discharge process (S106), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing this distribution discharge process (S106). This distribution discharge process (FIG. 19, S106) is a process for counting the number of game balls that have entered the distribution winning device 64 and are discharged from any of the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8. Will be executed. Hereinafter, the distribution discharge process (FIG. 19, S106) will be described.

In the distribution discharge process (FIG. 19, S106), first, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through any of the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8 of the distribution winning device 64 (S601). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through any of the first to eighth discharge ports 650a to 650a8 (S601: Yes), the distribution discharge ball number counter 203f is acquired (S602). 1 is added to the acquired value of the distribution discharge ball counter 203f to update the value, and the updated value is stored in the distribution discharge ball counter 203f (S603). The value of the acquired distribution discharge ball number counter 203f is 255, and when it is updated by adding 1, it is updated to 0. A distribution discharge ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the updated value of the distribution discharge ball number counter 203f is set (generated) (S604).

In this way, by counting the number of game balls discharged from the distribution winning device 64 and collating with the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e, the game illegally entered the distribution winning device 64. It is possible to monitor whether or not there is a ball (for example, a game ball is inserted from any of the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8).

Next, with reference to FIG. 20, a start winning process (S107), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S107). The start winning process (FIGS. 20, S107) determines whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300, and if a winning ball is won, it is special if the special symbol has stopped changing. The process of storing data such as various counter values acquired in the symbol execution area is executed. Further, when the game ball wins the first starting port 71, the flow time after winning the distribution winning device 64 of the game ball winning the first starting port 71 is a set value (in the present embodiment). It is determined whether it is within 5 seconds to 7 seconds), and if it is out of the set value, error processing is executed. Hereinafter, the start winning process (FIG. 24, S108) will be described.

In the start winning process (FIG. 20, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first starting opening 71 (S701). Here, the winning of the first starting port 71 is detected. When it is determined that the ball has won the first starting port 71 (there was a starting winning prize) (S701: Yes), it is determined whether or not the distribution winning flag 203h is set to ON (S702). When it is determined that the distribution winning flag 203h is off (S702: No), a winning winning error is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 that the first starting port 71 has been abnormally won. The command is set (generated) (S703). Here, the distribution winning flag 223h is a flag that is set to be turned on when the 256th game ball that will win a prize in the first starting port 71 enters the distribution winning device 64. If it is determined that the game ball has won the 1st starting port 71, but the distribution winning flag 203h is off, there is a possibility that the 1st starting port 71 has been illegally won. Perform error handling. As a result, even if the sensor or the like of the first starting port 71 is fraudulently turned on by an electromagnetic wave or the like from the outside of the gaming machine, the fraud can be detected and it is possible to prevent the jackpot from being illegally acquired. ..

The distribution winning flag 203h is set to off (S704). It is determined whether the value of the distribution winning timer 203g is within the set value (5 seconds to 7 seconds in this embodiment) (S705). In the present embodiment, the time required from passing through the ball entry port 640 of the distribution winning device 64 to winning the first starting port 71 is designed to be 6 seconds. Therefore, if 1 second before and after is set as the set value and 5 seconds to 7 seconds is set as the set value, a piano wire or the like is wound around the game ball to illegally reach the first starting port 71. Can detect fraud when the time until reaching the first starting port 71 is out of the set value.

If it is determined that the value of the distribution winning timer 203g is out of the set value (S705: No), the process of S703 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the distribution winning timer 203g is within the set value (S705: Yes), it is determined whether the special symbol is changing (S706). If it is determined that the special symbol is changing (S706: Yes), the process of S703 is executed. Here, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 71 and the special symbol is changed, the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation pattern is usually 10 seconds, which is the longest fluctuation pattern. Since it is not normal to win the first starting port 71 next time before this 10 seconds have elapsed, if it is determined that the special symbol has won the first starting port 71 during the fluctuation, it is determined that the first starting port 71 has won a prize. By setting the winning error command, the gaming store can recognize that there is an abnormality in the gaming machine at an early stage. Therefore, even if the first starting port 71 is illegally continuously won a prize, the damage caused by the fraud can be reduced by the game store side recognizing the fraud at an early stage.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (S706: No), each value of the random number counter C1 per special symbol, the special hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired, and the special symbol is executed. It is stored in the area 203a (S707). If it is determined that the game ball has not won the first starting port 71 (S701: No), the process of S708 is executed.

It is determined whether or not the game ball has won the second starting port 300 (S708). When it is determined that the game ball has not won the second starting port 300 (S708: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has won the second starting port 300 (S708: Yes), it is determined whether the special symbol is changing (S709). When it is determined that the special symbol is changing (S709), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (S709: No), the values of the random number counter C1 per special symbol, the special hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are acquired, and the special symbol is executed. It is stored in the area 203a (S710).

In this way, when the game ball wins the first starting port 71, the ball winning history to the distribution winning device 64 (the distribution winning flag 203h is on) indicates whether the winning is a regular winning. Whether or not), the flow time of the winning game ball (value of the distribution winning timer 203g), and whether or not the special symbol is changing are determined, and if even one does not match, each counter value is newly added. By executing the error processing that sets the winning error command without acquiring the data of, it is possible to suppress the illegal occurrence of big hits.

In the present embodiment, it is difficult for the game ball to win a prize at the first starting port 71 and the second starting port 300 at the same time. Further, if a game ball wins a prize at the first starting port 71 and the second starting port 300 at the same time, the first starting port 71 is given priority. The game ball that has won the second starting port 300 is treated as an invalid ball as the special symbol is changing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21, a normal symbol variation process (S108), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S108). The normal symbol variation process (S108) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83, the opening time of the blades 300a and 300b of the ordinary electric accessory, and the like.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit. (S801). The hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol) includes from the display indicating the hit on the second symbol display device 83 to the middle of the opening / closing control of the blades 300a and 300b of the ordinary electric accessory. .. If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S801: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S801: No), it is determined whether the ordinary symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being displayed in a variable manner (S802). When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (S802: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variable time of the normal symbol being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed (S802: Yes). S803). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S822, which will be described later, before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device 83. Regardless of the time-saving game state and the normal game state (non-time-saving game state), the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is set with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds for both the hit fluctuation pattern and the miss fluctuation pattern.

In the process of S803, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S803: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S803, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol to be variablely displayed has elapsed (S803: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S804). .. In the processing of S804, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the processing of S817, the "○" symbol is stopped and displayed (lighting display) on the second symbol display device 83 as the second symbol. ) Is set to be done. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is missed and the display mode at the time of the miss is set by the process of S821, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83 as the second symbol. Is set to be displayed). When the stop display is set by the process of S804, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 ends, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is the second in the display mode set in the process of S817 and the process of S821. 2 A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the symbol display device 83.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a hit (S805). When it is determined that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a hit (S805: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the blades 300a and 300b of the ordinary electric accessory is set (806). On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol this time is out of order (S805: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S802, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the variable display (S802: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired. (S807).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S808). When it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S808: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203c is not 0 (S808: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S809).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S810). In the process of S810, the data stored in the normal symbol hold 1 to the normal symbol hold 4 of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, normal symbol hold 1 → execution area, normal symbol hold 2 → normal symbol hold 1, normal symbol hold 3 → normal symbol hold 2, normal symbol hold 4 → normal symbol hold 4 and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area is acquired (S811).

Next, it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203d is 1 or more (that is, is not 0) (S812). When it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203d is 0 (that is, it is not in the time reduction) (S812: No), the random number table 202c per normal symbol for non-time reduction (normal game state) (FIG. 8 (c)). ), The hit / fail judgment result is acquired (S1013). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203k is not 0 (that is, the time is being shortened) (S812: Yes). , It is determined whether the special symbol is in the jackpot (S814). If it is determined that the special symbol is in the jackpot (S814: Yes), the process of S813 is executed. On the other hand, the special symbol jackpot is executed. If it is determined not to be inside (S814: No), the hit / fail judgment result is acquired based on the hit judgment value of the random number table 202c (FIG. 8 (c)) per normal symbol for time saving (time saving game state). (S815).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is a win (S816). When it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is a hit (S816: Yes), the display mode of "○", which is the display mode at the time of winning, is set (S817). The opening time of the blades 300a and 300b of the ordinary electric accessory is set to 1 s, and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S820). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is not a hit (that is, it is out of order) (S816: No), the display mode of "x" which is the display mode at the time of out of order is set. Is done (S819). Then, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set to 3 s (S822).

Next, the through-gate passage process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S109). This through gate passage process (S109) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal symbol start port 67, and when the game ball has passed. , This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4 per normal symbol.

In the through gate passing process (FIG. 22, S109), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (gate) 67 (S901). Here, it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol start port 67 over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port 67 (S901: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is acquired (S902). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S903).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (gate) 67 (S901: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203c is If it is not less than 4 (S903: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67 (S901: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S903: Yes), the normal symbol hold ball number counter The value (M) of 203c is added by 1 (S904). Then, the value of the random number counter C4 per normal symbol acquired in S106 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the free hold areas (normal symbol hold 1 to normal symbol hold 4) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Store in the area (S905). In the process of S905, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the area of the normal symbol hold 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the area of normal symbol hold 2 is set, if the value is 2, the area of normal symbol hold 3 is set, and if the value is 3, the area of normal symbol hold 4 is set first. Area.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S910), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 24, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 24), first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1001). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S1002). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch (FIGS. 5, 122) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1004), and if it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process shifts to S1012. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (FIGS. 5, 122) is not turned on (S1004: No), it is further determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005), and if it is not stored. (S1005: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S1012 in this case as well.

If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1007: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S1112 even in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1012, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S1012). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S1013, S1014) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch (FIGS. 5, 122). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (FIGS. 5, 122) is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 initialization process (S1013, S1014) is executed.

Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (S1013, S1014) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner. .. In the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1013), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1014).

The distribution position initialization process is executed (S1015). The details of the distribution position initialization process (S1015) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26, but the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 of the distribution winning device 64 are predetermined. This is a process for setting the initial value. After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S1010.

On the other hand, the RAM erase switch (FIGS. 5, 122) is not turned on (S1004: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S1005: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is stored. If it is normal (S1007: Yes), the power outage occurrence information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1008). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S1010). After that, interrupts are permitted (S1011). Then, the process proceeds to the main process (FIG. 27, S1200) described later.

In the present embodiment, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is in the initialized state when the power is turned on until the distribution winning ball number command or the like is output from the main control device 110. Not limited to this, the information backed up by the main control device 110 (for example, the value of the distribution winning ball number counter 203e) in the process of S1010 of the start-up process (FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Etc.) may be output as a backup command so that the voice lamp control device 113 backs up the MPU 221. With this configuration, the audio lamp control device 113 can also back up data and the like to the state immediately before the power is turned off.

Next, the distribution position initialization process (S1015), which is one of the start-up processes (FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. 25 and 26 are flowcharts showing the distribution position initialization process (S1015).

In the distribution position initialization process (FIGS. 25 and 26, S1015), first, the position of the first distribution rotation member 64a1 is acquired from the distribution position confirmation sensor 262 (S1101). Here, the distribution position confirmation sensor 262 is an angle sensor that detects the rotation angle of the first distribution rotation member 64a1, and is not only the first distribution rotation member 64a1 but also the second to eighth distribution rotation members 64a2. The rotation angles of ~ 64a8 can also be detected. The rotation angle is set to be a positive value when the first accommodating portions 64c1 to 64c8 are facing upward, and to be a negative value when the second accommodating portions 64d1 to 64d8 are facing upward. If the acquired value is a positive value, "1" is acquired, and if it is a negative value, "0" is acquired.

The initial position data of the first distribution rotating member 64a1 in which the value acquired in the process of S1101 is stored in the distribution initial position data 202h (in the present embodiment, it indicates that the first accommodating portion 64c1 faces upward. It is determined whether the value is the same as the value of "1") (S1102). If it is determined that the acquired value is the same as the initial position data (S1102: Yes), the process of S1104 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired value is different from the initial position data (S1102: No), the initial position data of the first distribution rotating member 64a1 stored in the distribution initial position data 202h (the present embodiment). Then, the distribution position adjusting motor 263 is set according to “10101010”) (S1103). In the present embodiment, the distribution position adjusting motor 263 is set so as to rotate the first distribution rotation member 64a1 to the right to a predetermined angle (in this embodiment, a position of plus 90 degrees).

In the processes of S1104 to S1124, the initial positions of the second to eighth distribution rotation members 64a2 to 64a8 are set in the same manner as the first distribution rotation member 64a1. The initial position of the second distribution rotating member 64a2 is a position of minus 90 degrees, which is the position where the second accommodating portion 64d2 faces upward, and the initial position of the third distribution rotating member 64a3 is the position of the first accommodating portion 64c3. The initial position of the fourth distribution rotation member 64a4 is the position of minus 90 degrees, which is the position where the second accommodating portion 64d4 faces upward, and the fifth distribution rotation. The initial position of the member 64a5 is the position where the first accommodating portion 64c5 faces upward, plus 90 degrees, and the initial position of the sixth distribution rotating member 64a6 is the position where the second accommodating portion 64d6 faces upward. A certain minus 90 degree position, the initial position of the seventh distribution rotating member 64a7 is a position of plus 90 degrees, which is the position where the first accommodating portion 64c7 faces upward, and the initial position of the eighth distribution rotation member 64a8 is. The second accommodating portion 64d8 is set at a position of minus 90 degrees, which is a position facing upward. The setting method is the same as that of the first distribution rotating member 64a1, and is omitted.

In this way, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized (when the RAM erase switch 122 is operated, etc.), the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 are set to predetermined initial positions, respectively. As a result, the game store side changes the state of the distribution winning device 64 to a state in which the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e in which no game ball is contained is 0 (the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8). When it is desired to set all of the above to the positions in which the game balls are guided to the first to eighth discharge guide paths 64z1 to 64z15), the RAM erase switch 122 is operated to initialize the RAM 203. , The distribution winning device 64 can also be automatically set to the initial state. Therefore, at the time of opening a game store, a plurality of game machines can be easily set to the same state (the value of the same distribution winning ball number counter 203e).

Further, in the present embodiment, the initial position of the distribution winning device 64 is set to a state in which the number of winning balls counter 203e in which no game ball has entered the distribution winning device 64 is 0, but the present invention is not limited to this. The value of the number counter 203e is set to 255 (the position where the first to eighth taxiing rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 guide the game ball to the first to eighth guide paths 64z2 to 64z16), and immediately the first The starting port 71 may be configured to win a prize and be set in a state where a big hit can be given. With this configuration, the pachinko / pachislot machine can be prepared by the pachinko / pachislot machine to immediately give a big hit, and it is possible to attract a large number of customers who come to the store in search of the pachinko / pachislot machine set as such at the time of opening. It is possible to increase the number of customers who come to the store from the time it opens. It should be noted that the state of the distribution winning device 64 may be appropriately configured so that the game store can set the state with a switch or the like.

In the present embodiment, the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 are confirmed and the initial values are set, but the present invention is not limited to all of them. The distribution rotating member of the above may be configured to be forcibly set to the initial value. In this way, the initial setting process can be simplified by collectively performing the initial setting process regardless of the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8. Therefore, the processing at the time of turning on the power can be shortened.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the main process (S1200) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process (FIG. 24) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this main process (S1200). In this main process (S1200), the counter update process, the power off time process, and the monitoring process of abnormal winning to the distribution winning device 64 are executed.

In the main process (FIG. 27, S1200), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is input to each of the sub-sides. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1201).

The prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1202, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit, various effects are executed according to the big hit, and the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a. The jackpot control process for opening or closing is executed (S1203). The electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the blades 300a and 300b of the electric accessory attached to the second starting port 300 is executed (S1204). In the electric accessory opening / closing process (S1204), when the opening time of the electric accessory is set as a normal symbol hit, or when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot, the opening time of the electric accessory is set. And when the number of times of opening is set, the electric accessory is opened and closed according to the opening time and the number of times of opening.

Next, the display control process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1205). The display control process of the second symbol (for example, the symbol of "○" or "x") by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1206). Briefly, on condition that the sphere has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 83 is used. The second symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Then, a lottery for the second symbol is carried out based on the value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol, and when the second symbol is in the winning state, the blades 300a and 300b of the ordinary electric accessory are opened for a predetermined time.

Next, distribution error processing is executed (S1207). The details of the distribution error processing (S1207) will be described later with reference to FIG. 28, but the difference between the game balls that have won the distribution winning device 64 and the game balls that have been discharged is an abnormal set value (in the present embodiment, (10 or more) or when the 256th game ball has entered the distribution winning device 64, the flow time of the game ball is equal to or more than the average number of seconds reached to the first starting port 71 (this implementation). In the form, it is determined whether or not 7 seconds or more have passed, and a process for determining an abnormality is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1208), and if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1208: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S1209). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1209: Yes), the process is shifted to S1201, and each process after S1201 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S1209: No), the initial time is reached within the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process. The value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated (S1210).

Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (109, 99 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively.

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1201 to S1207 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the random number counter per special symbol) The initial value of C1 and the initial value of the random number counter C4 per normal symbol) can be updated at random.

Further, in the processing of S1208, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1208: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 23 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1211 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1211), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). Is transmitted (S1212). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1213), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1214), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The process of S1208 is executed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1201 to S1207, or at the end of one cycle of the process of S1210 performed within the remaining time. ing. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1201 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, in the initial setting process (FIG. 24, S1001), By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1201. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the distribution error processing (S1207), which is one of the main processing (FIG. 27, S1200) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this distribution error processing (S1207).

In the distribution error processing (FIG. 28, S1207), first, the value of the distribution discharge ball number counter 203f is subtracted from the value of the distribution winning ball number counter 203e to be equal to or more than the abnormal set value (10 or more in this embodiment). ) (S1301). The subtraction here is an operation for obtaining the number of difference balls between the entered game ball and the discharged game ball. For example, the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e is 3, and the distribution is performed. If the value of the ejection ball counter 203f is 254, the subtraction result is calculated as 5. In the present embodiment, the number of game balls being entered in the distribution winning device 64 is 9 if it is a design value, and if there are more than that, the balls are entered without going through the entry slot 640 (for example, the first). -The game ball is inserted from any of the eighth outlets 650a1 to 650a8).

If it is determined that the difference between the distribution winning ball number counter 203e and the distribution discharge ball number counter 203f is equal to or greater than the abnormal set value (S1301: Yes), an error notification command is set (generated) (S1302). .. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error notification command, it generates a display command for displaying the display mode (for example, characters such as "character abnormality winning error") indicating an abnormality on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the difference between the distribution winning ball number counter 203e and the distribution discharge ball number counter 203f is less than the abnormal set value (S1301: No), the distribution winning flag 203h is set to ON. It is determined whether or not (S1303). When it is determined that the distribution winning flag 203h is set to off (S1303: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the distribution winning flag 203h is set to ON (S1303: Yes), the value of the distribution winning timer 203g is acquired. 1 is added to the value of the acquired distribution winning timer 203g (S1305).

It is determined whether the value of the distribution winning timer 203g is a value indicating the average number of seconds reached (7 seconds or more in the transliteration form) (S1306). When it is determined that the value of the distribution winning timer 203g is equal to or longer than the average number of seconds reached (S1306: Yes), an error notification command is set (S1307). The process of S1307 is the same as that of S1302. On the other hand, when it is determined that the distribution winning timer 203g is less than the average number of seconds reached (S1306: No), this process is terminated.

In this way, the distribution error processing (FIG. 28, S1207) is executed at intervals of 4 ms, and it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the distribution winning device 64. As soon as it is determined that a game ball exceeding the design value has entered the distribution winning device 64 (there is a difference between the number of balls entered and the number of balls discharged), error processing can be executed. Therefore, fraud and abnormalities of the pachinko machine 10 can be detected at an early stage. Therefore, the damage caused by fraud can be further reduced.

Further, when it is determined that the number of winning balls (256 in the present embodiment) that the game balls will win in the first starting port 71 in the distribution winning device 64 is determined, the game is played. Since it is configured to monitor the time until the ball reaches the first starting port 71, the control load of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is always compared with the case of monitoring the flow time of the game ball that has entered the ball. Can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, the number for determining the difference between the number of balls entered in the distribution winning device 64 and the number of ejected balls as abnormal is set to a preset value, but the number is not limited to that and can be set by the game store side. A setting switch or the like may be provided. With this configuration, it is possible to adjust and set according to the change in the ratio of the game balls entering the distribution winning device 64 (frequency of entering the balls) due to the adjustment of the game nails and the like. Therefore, it is possible to monitor the abnormality with the abnormality set value more according to the state of the pachinko machine 10, and it is possible to accurately detect the abnormality.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 29 to 35, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process (S1600) that is executed after the start-up process.

First, with reference to FIG. 29, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process (FIG. 29) is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1501). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S1619 (see FIG. 30) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1502). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 30, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see FIGS. 30 and S1616), the power cutoff process of S1619 is executed. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1619 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1502: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power is turned off in S1619. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1503).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1506. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1503: Yes), the process proceeds to S1504 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1503: No), the process proceeds to S1508.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1503: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1504. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1619 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1503: No), and the data shifts to S1508.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1502: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S169, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1504 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1504, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1304). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1505: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1506). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1505: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1507), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The audio output device 226 may output audio to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S1508, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1508). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1619 is executed (see FIGS. 30, S1618). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1619 is executed, the process of S1508 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1619 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1508: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1509), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1510), and then an interrupt is interrupted. After setting the permission (S1513), the process proceeds to the main process (FIG. 30, S1600). The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1508 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power supply is completely shut off, for example, so that the process of S1508 is performed via the processes of S1504 to S1506. This is the case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1508: No), S1509, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1510, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1510).

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1509 is that when the processing of S1508 is reached via the processing of S1504 to S1506, the processing of S1504 has already cleared all the storage areas of the RAM 223. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the main process (S1600) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this main process (S1600). When the main process (S1600) is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process (S1600) was started or the previous process of S1601 was executed (S1600). S1601) If 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed (S1601: No), the process proceeds to S1611 without performing the processes of S1602 to S1610. In the process of S1601, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has passed because S1602 to S1610 are processes related to display (directing), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the variation display process of S1611 and the command determination process of S1614 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1611 in a short cycle, the setting related to the variation display effect can be performed without delay based on the command received by the command determination process, and the process of S1614 is executed in a short cycle. It is possible to prevent omission of reception of commands transmitted from the main control device 110.

If 1 millisecond or more has passed in the process of S1601 (S1601: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1603 to S1614 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1601: Yes). S1602). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1609 described later (S1603), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1604). .. The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process proceeds to the process of S1405 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1605, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1606). In the customer waiting effect, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is a display control device as a command. It is transmitted to 114. In the hold quantity display update process (S1606), as will be described in detail later, a process of updating the display of the hold symbol display of the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the data of the subordinate sort hold storage area 223k. ..

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1607). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is then executed (S1608), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1609). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1609, the liquid crystal display effect execution management process is executed (S1610). After that, the process proceeds to S1611. In the liquid crystal display execution management process (S1610), a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1608 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal display effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1609 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1611, in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is generated by the display control device 114. Executes the variable display setting process, which is the process set to send to. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 33.

After the variation display setting process (S1611), the pseudo variation process is executed (S1612). The pseudo-variation process (S1612) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 34, but a pseudo-variation pattern (pseudo-dynamic display) of a pseudo-symbol to be displayed (dynamically displayed) by the third symbol display device 81. Aspect) is determined, and a process of generating a pseudo-variation pattern for display indicating the determined variation pattern is executed.

After the pseudo-variation process (S1612), the background selection process is executed (S1613). The background selection process (S1613) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 35, but it is determined whether or not the condition for changing the background image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is satisfied. , When changing, a process for determining the type of background image to be changed is executed.

A command determination process that performs a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is executed (S1614). Details of this command determination process (S1614) will be described later with reference to FIG. 31.

When the process of S1614 is completed, a process of updating each counter that adds 1 to the counter value of the pseudo-variation selection counter 223a or the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (S1615). It is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1615). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1615 (S1615: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S1618), and the power-off process is executed (S1619). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1620), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power off processing, the occurrence of the interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. The memory of the power failure occurrence information is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1616 (S1616: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1617), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1617: No), the process returns to the process of S1601 and the main process (S1600) is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1617: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process (S1600) is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, for convenience of explanation, the command determination process (S1614) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described first with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1614). This command determination process (S1614) is executed in the main process (FIG. 30, S1600) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. do. Hereinafter, the details of the command determination process (S1614) will be described.

In the command determination process (FIG. 31, S1614), first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control unit 110 is read from the command storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed. It is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1701). Here, the variation pattern command is a command indicating a variation display mode for displaying a special symbol in a variation manner. Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has been received (S1701: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223b provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1702). The type of variation pattern is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1703). The type of the variation pattern extracted here is identifiablely stored in the other memory area 223g of the RAM 223 as the type of the variation pattern of the special symbol, and is displayed in the variation display setting process (FIG. 33, S1611) described later. It is used when setting a variation pattern command for displaying a special symbol that notifies the control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the special symbol and the type of the variation pattern of the special symbol.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S1701: No), it is determined whether the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1704). When it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S1704: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223c is set to ON when the stop type command is received. When the stop type command is received, the stop type selection flag 223c is set to on. (S1705). The stop type (either jackpot A or jackpot B) is extracted from the received stop type command (S1706). The extracted stop type is stored in the voice lamp control device 113 in the other memory area 223 g of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S1704: No), it is determined whether or not the distribution winning ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1707). If it is determined that the distribution winning ball number command has been received (S1707: Yes), the number of winning balls indicated by the received distribution winning ball number command is extracted, and the value obtained by subtracting 1 from that value is subordinated. It is stored (stored) in the winning ball number counter 223d (S1708). Here, when the value of the distribution winning ball number counter 223d is 0, subtracting 1 gives 255. The value of the winning counter 223f is acquired, 1 is added to the value to update the value, and the value is stored in the winning counter 223f (S1709).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the distribution winning ball number command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S1707: No), it is determined whether the distribution discharge ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1707: No). S1710). When it is determined that the distribution discharge ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1710: Yes), the discharge ball number is extracted from the received distribution discharge ball number command, and the value subtracted by 1 is used as the subordinate. It is stored in the distribution discharge ball number counter 223e (S1711). Here, when the distribution discharge ball number command is a command indicating 0, subtracting 1 gives 255. The value of the winning counter 223f is acquired, and the updated value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value is stored in the winning counter 223f (S1712).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the distribution discharge ball number command has not been received (S1710: No), it is determined whether the error notification command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1713). When it is determined that the error notification command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1713: Yes), the display error notification command is set (generated) (S1714). This error notification command is a command for displaying the error content in characters on the third symbol display device 81 based on the type of error notification command output by the main control device 110.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the error notification command has not been received (S1713: No), it is determined whether the ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1715). When it is determined that the ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1715: Yes), the ending setting process is executed (S1717). The ending setting process (S1717) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 32, but will be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the type of the executed jackpot game (either jackpot A or jackpot B). The process of setting the ending screen is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S1716: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S1716).

Next, the ending setting process (S1719), which is one of the command determination processes (FIG. 31, S1614) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this ending setting process (S1719).

In the ending setting process (FIG. 32, S1719), first, it is determined whether the jackpot being executed is the jackpot A (shifts to the time-saving game state after the 16R jackpot) (S1801). When it is determined that the jackpot during execution is the jackpot A (S1801: Yes), the time saving effect display (FIG. 13a) is set as the display mode (ending image) of the ending effect (S1802). On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot being executed is jackpot B (shifts to the normal gaming state after 16R jackpot) (S1801: No), as a display mode of the ending effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , The normal effect display (FIG. 13 (b)) is set (S1803). Set (generate) a display ending command that indicates the set ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 13A, the character "Makai mode entry" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the time saving effect display. In the present embodiment, the time-saving game state is notified by the name of the demon world mode, and the player is notified that the time-saving game state is in effect. Further, in the normal effect display, as shown in FIG. 13B, the characters "Entering the heavenly challenge mode" are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the normal gaming state (non-time saving gaming state) is notified by the name of the heavenly challenge mode. The player recognizes that the heavenly world challenge mode shifts to the game in which the distribution winning device 64 wins the game ball in the first starting port 71 (in the production of the game, the ball reaches the heavenly world).

In the present embodiment, the player determines for the first time whether the executed jackpot is jackpot A or jackpot B based on the display mode of the ending. As a result, until just before the end of the jackpot, the game can be played with the expectation that the jackpot being executed is the jackpot A.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, a variation display setting process (S1611), which is one process in the main process (FIG. 30, S1600) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S1611).

In the variation display setting process (FIG. 33, S1611), first, it is determined whether the variation start flag 223b provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1901). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223b is off (S1901: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so the process of S1909 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223b is on (S1901: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223b is set to off (S1902).

In the third symbol display device 81, it is determined whether or not the pseudo symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S1903). When it is determined that the pseudo symbol is in the stop display (S1903: No), the variation in the variation display effect of the special symbol extracted from the variation pattern command in the process of S1703 of the command determination process (FIGS. 31, S1614). The pattern is acquired from the other memory area 223g of the RAM 223 (S1904).

On the other hand, when it is determined in the third symbol display device 81 that the pseudo symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S1903: Yes), the pseudo variable pattern of the pseudo symbol displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is changed. It is determined whether the pattern is a ceiling fluctuation pattern (S1905). When it is determined that the pseudo fluctuation pattern that is variablely displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is the ceiling fluctuation pattern (S1905: Yes), the ceiling special fluctuation pattern is acquired (selected) (S1906). On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo fluctuation pattern displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is not the ceiling fluctuation pattern (S1905: No), the switching special fluctuation pattern is acquired (selected) (S1907). A display variation pattern command corresponding to the acquired variation pattern is set (generated) (S1908).

It is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223c is set to ON (S1909). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223c is off (S1909: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223c is on (S1909: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d1 is set to off (S1910).

In the process of S1706 of the command determination process (FIG. 31, S1614), the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is set (S1911). A display stop type command corresponding to the set stop type is set (S1912).

In this way, when the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110, if the pseudo symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is variablely displayed, the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command is replaced. Then, the ceiling special fluctuation pattern or the switching special fluctuation pattern is selected. As a result, the display mode of the special symbol can be matched with the display mode connected to the content displayed by the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the variable display with the pseudo symbol and the variable display with the special symbol, and even the variable display with the pseudo symbol can be expected to be a big hit. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, a pseudo-variation process (S1612), which is one process in the main process (FIG. 30, S1600) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this pseudo-variation process (S1612). The pseudo-variation process (FIG. 34, S1612) is a process for determining the variation pattern of the pseudo-symbol to be variable-displayed by the third symbol display device 81. The pseudo-variation process (FIG. 34, S1612) will be described below.

In the pseudo-variation processing (FIG. 34, S1612), first, it is determined in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 whether or not the special symbol is in the variation display (S2001). If it is determined that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S2001: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is stopped and displayed (2001: No), it is determined whether or not the pseudo symbol is variablely displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (S2002). If it is determined that the pseudo symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S2002: Yes), the process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (S2002: No), it is determined that the distribution winning ball number command has been received in the process of S1707 of the command determination process (FIG. 31, S1614). It is determined whether or not (S2003). When it is determined that the distribution winning ball number command has been received (S2003: Yes), the value of the pseudo-variation selection counter 223a is acquired (S2004). Based on the value of the pseudo-variation selection counter 223a acquired in the process of S2004 and the value of the follow-up winning ball number counter 223d, the pseudo-variation pattern is selected (determined) from the pseudo-variation table 222e (see FIG. 10A). (S2005). A pseudo-variation pattern command corresponding to the selected pseudo-variation pattern is set (generated) (S2006). On the other hand, if it is determined that the distribution winning ball number command has not been received (S2003: No), this process ends.

In this way, when the special symbol and the pseudo symbol are not variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the distribution winning ball number command is received (that is, the game is played at the entrance 640 of the distribution winning device 64). (When a ball enters), the pseudo-variation pattern of the pseudo-symbol is selected, and the start of the variation display of the pseudo-symbol is set. Therefore, the player feels as if the lottery game has started due to the ball entering the entrance 640 of the distribution winning device 64, and the pseudo symbol variation display is displayed as a special symbol variation display. You can see the fluctuation of the pseudo pattern with the expectation of a big hit, feeling as if it were there. Therefore, it is possible to prevent getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, even if the player is skilled in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the pseudo pattern is the ratio (selection) of the type of the pseudo variation pattern selected by the value of the follow-up winning ball number counter 223d. Since the frequency is set to be different, the number of game balls that have won the current distribution winning device 64 can be predicted depending on the type of the pseudo-variation pattern selected and the frequency thereof. Therefore, even if the player knows that the pseudo symbol is fluctuating, he / she can obtain more important information related to the jackpot than the pseudo fluctuation pattern of the pseudo symbol, and is more interested in the variation display of the pseudo symbol. You can play games.

Next, the background selection process (S1613), which is one of the main processes (FIG. 30, S1600) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this background selection process (S1613). The background selection process (FIGS. 35, S1613) determines whether or not to change the background image displayed by the third symbol display device 81, and executes a process of determining the background image to be changed. Hereinafter, the background selection process (FIG. 35, S1613) will be described.

In the background selection process (FIG. 35, S1613), first, the value of the sub-winning counter 223f is greater than 3, that is, the number of game balls that have entered (remained) in the distribution winning device 64. Is determined to be 4 or more (S2101). When it is determined that the number of game balls entering the distribution winning device 64 is 4 or more (S2101: Yes), the value of the pseudo-variation selection counter 223a is acquired (S2102). A background pattern is selected from the background selection table 222f (see FIG. 10B) based on the value of the pseudo-variation selection counter 223a acquired in the process of S2102 and the value of the follow-on distribution winning ball number counter 223d (S2103). .. A display background command corresponding to the selected background pattern is set (generated) (S2104). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the winning counter 223f is 3 or less (S2101: No), this process ends.

In this way, when the number of game balls entered in the distribution winning device 64 is 4 or more, the background image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, so that it is random. The background image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed at various timings. Further, the selected background image is the ratio of the types of background images (selected background image) selected according to the number of game balls entered in the distribution winning device 64 (value of the follow-up distribution winning ball number counter 223d). Since the frequency of You can be interested.

Further, the background image selected when the 256th game ball to be won in the first starting port 71 enters the distribution winning device 64 is limited to the precursor C background (FIG. 13 (c)). Therefore, if the precursor C background is selected, it is possible to expect that the first starting port 71 will win a prize. Therefore, the player can be interested in the background image in addition to the jackpot, and can prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In this way, a predetermined number of game balls (256 in the present embodiment) win a prize in the distribution winning device 64, so that the player is always given a big hit, so that the big hit is given to the player for a long time. Can be prevented from the problem that is not given. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the damage to the player from becoming excessively large.

Further, in such a configuration, there is a concern that the player may get tired of the game by the time a predetermined number wins the distribution winning device 64, but there is a concern that the pseudo symbol configured in the same display mode as the special symbol. By starting the variation display at the timing when the game ball enters the distribution winning device 64, the player can enjoy the variation display of the pseudo symbol as if the variation of the special symbol has started. Therefore, it is possible to prevent getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In addition, when the game is started after another person has played the game or when the store is opened, it is not possible to determine how many game balls are in the distribution winning device 64, but the pseudo fluctuation pattern of the pseudo symbol is shaken. The frequency (ratio) of the type of pseudo-variation pattern selected based on the number of game balls entered in the prize-winning device 64 (value of the follow-up prize-winning ball counter 223d) is set to be changed. Therefore, the number of game balls entered in the distribution winning device 64 can be predicted from the type of the pseudo-variation pattern selected. Therefore, even while the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, it is possible to prevent the game from getting bored by the variable display of the pseudo symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the normal game state (non-time saving game state), a jackpot does not occur until a predetermined number (256 in the present embodiment) enters the distribution winning device 64, and the time is shortened. When the game is in the game state, the ball can be entered into the second starting port 300, and the player is given a jackpot at an early stage. By making a big difference, it is possible to make the player have a stronger desire to shift to the time-saving game state and play the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent early getting bored with the game. In addition, it is possible to entertain the player with different types of games, which are significantly different between the normal game state and the time-saving game state.

In addition, by winning a prize in the first starting port 71, a big hit is always made, but if a prize is won in the first starting port 71, the ball is entered in the ball entry port 640 of the distribution winning device 64. By determining whether the arrival time until winning the first starting port 71 is appropriate, and whether the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 of the distribution winning device 64 are appropriate, a jackpot due to fraud can be determined. It can be suppressed that it is given. Therefore, the damage caused by fraud can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, by counting the number of game balls that have entered the ball entry port 640, the number of balls that have entered the first starting port 71 (the number of balls that have entered the ceiling) is counted. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and it is natural that the configuration may be such that the determination is made at each position of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8. With this configuration, it is not necessary to perform the process of counting the number of game balls that have entered the ball entry port 640, so that the control load of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced. Further, after the distribution rotating member guides the game ball, it returns to the position before the guidance (for example, after receiving the game ball and guiding the game ball with the first accommodating portion facing upward). , The momentum is too strong, or the first accommodating part faces upward again due to vibration to the pachinko machine 10.) Even if a problem occurs, the count value of the ball entry port 640 and the distribution rotation member It is possible to suppress a problem that the state (position) is deviated, and it is possible to determine the number of balls to be inserted by the first starting port 71 based on the current position of the distribution rotating member.

Further, the count value of the ball entry port 640 and the respective positions of the 1st to 8th distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 are collated at regular intervals and the count value is compared with the count values of the 1st to 8th distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a1. It may be configured to make corrections based on the position of 64a8. In such a case, if the collation result is corrected differently more than a predetermined number of times, an error notification can be sent and the game store can confirm whether the fraud has been performed or whether the problem is due to a failure. It may be configured as follows. With this configuration, the count value of the ball entry port 640 and the states of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 can be accurately matched, and accurate production and the like can be controlled. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, since it is composed of eight distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8, each position can be indicated by 1-bit data, and a total of 8 bits. Since it can be composed of data, data can be easily transmitted and received.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 66. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the number of balls to be entered into the first starting port 71 is entered into the distribution winning device 64, and the game ball is awarded to the first starting opening 71. When it becomes a big hit, the case where the game ball is launched toward the specific winning opening 65a in the right side area of the game area where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the distribution winning device 64 has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the specific winning opening 65a is arranged close to the distribution winning device 64, and when a big hit occurs, the game ball enters the distribution winning device 64 even during the big hit. It was configured to be. Further, depending on the jackpot type, after the jackpot game, the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 of the distribution winning device 64 are set to predetermined positions by lottery, so that the distribution winning device 64 after the jackpot game The number of balls required to win a prize in the first starting port 71 of the above is variably set. Further, the distribution winning device 64 is provided with two ordinary electric accessories, which are different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that a game ball is guided to a predetermined distribution rotation member when each is opened. do.

Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and a display control device. The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 36 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. In the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the second symbol display device 83 is provided with display units for displaying the result of determining whether or not the first ordinary symbol is correct or not, arranged side by side with “○” and “×”. Below that, display units for displaying the result of determining whether the second normal symbol is correct or not are provided side by side with "○" and "×". Further, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is a ball (holding ball) whose variation display has not been executed among the game balls that have won the first normal symbol start port 67s1 and the second normal symbol start port 67s2. A display unit is set to indicate the number of reserved balls, which is the number, depending on the lighting state.

The variable winning device 65 provided on the lower right side of the game area is provided on the upper left of the distribution winning device 64 in the center of the game area. A general winning opening 63 is arranged on the lower right side of the game area. Further, on the right side surface of the distribution winning device 64, the first blade 64s1 of the first ordinary electric accessory and the second blade 64s2 of the second ordinary electric accessory, which are ordinary electric accessories, are provided, respectively.

In the normal game state (a game state that is not a jackpot game state), the player rotates the operation handle 51 to the maximum to the right to launch the game ball with the maximum firing force, thereby causing the game area on the right side (a game state that is not a jackpot game state). The game ball is fired so that the game ball flows down (on the right side of the variable display device unit 80). Then, the game ball is launched so that the game ball enters the first normal symbol start port 67s1, the second normal symbol start port 67s2, and the ball entry port 640. On the other hand, in the jackpot game state, the game ball is launched so that the game ball flows down in the game area on the left side (left side of the variable display device unit 80).

Then, as shown in FIG. 39, during the jackpot game, the variable winning device 65 rotates the opening / closing plate downward toward the front side for a predetermined period of time, and causes the game ball flowing down the game area on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate. Receive and guide to the specific winning opening 65a. When the opening / closing plate is rotated downward, the rotation is restricted on the specific winning opening 65a side (about 85 to 88 degrees) slightly more than 90 degrees, and the opening / closing plate is tilted in the direction of the specific winning opening 65a. Further, the shape of the upper surface of the opening / closing plate is formed with a tapered surface 65s inclined toward the right end portion, and the game ball dropped on the tapered surface is guided to the entrance 640 of the distribution winning device 64. It is configured to.

With such a configuration, when the jackpot game is started, the game ball is more likely to enter the ball entry port 640 of the distribution winning device 64 than in the normal game state (game state other than the jackpot game). Therefore, when the 256th game ball enters the distribution winning device 64 and wins the first starting port 71 and becomes a big hit, the game ball is sent to the distribution winning device 64 while playing the big hit game. By entering the ball, after the big hit game, the game ball is in a state of winning the distribution winning device 64 to some extent, and then the number of remaining balls up to the 256th ball can be reduced. Therefore, the player can be given the following hits at an early stage.

Further, by firing the game ball weakly, it is possible to adjust so that the game ball does not easily fall on the tapered surface 65s (the game ball flows down near the left side of the variable winning device 65), and the player swings. When it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the prize-winning device 64 is approaching 256 that will win the first starting port 71, the firing force of the game balls is weakened by adjusting the operation handle 51. 256 game balls enter the distribution winning device 64 during the jackpot game, and the first starting port 71 wins a prize during the jackpot game, so that the winning to the first starting port 71 becomes an invalid ball. It is configured to prevent it from becoming. Therefore, the profit that the player can obtain changes depending on the judgment of the player and the game method, so that the player can concentrate more and play the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game.

In addition, since the jackpot is continuously performed the upper limit number of times (for example, 5 times in a row), the launch of the game ball can be set so as not to be weakly adjusted, and the first starting port 71 is intentionally made to win a prize during the jackpot. It may be configured as. By doing so, it is possible to set an upper limit on the number of consecutive jackpots, and it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Further, as shown in FIG. 37, the distribution winning device 64 is provided with the first blade 64s1 diagonally above the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6 on the right side surface, and the second blade 64s1 is diagonally upward above the eighth distribution rotation member 64a8. The blades 64s2 are provided respectively. The first blade 64s1 and the second blade 64s2 are configured to be rotatable about 45 degrees to the outside of the distribution winning device 64 with the lower end as an axis by a solenoid, respectively. The first blade 64s1 is configured to always stand vertically to block the first normal entry port 640s1 through which a game ball formed on the right side surface of the distribution winning device 64 can pass, and the first normal When it hits the symbol, it rotates about 45 degrees to the right to guide the game ball to the first normal ball entrance. Further, the second blade 64s2 is also configured in the same manner as the first blade 64s1. The first normal entry port 640s1 and the second normal entry port 640s2 are each composed of a gate type sensor capable of detecting that a game ball has passed.

Although not shown in FIG. 37, as shown in FIG. 38, a game in which the first blade 64s1 rotates inside the taxiing winning device 64 and enters the first normal entrance 640s1. A first ordinary guide path 64m1 for guiding the ball to the sixth taxiing rotating member 64a6 is provided. The first ordinary guide path 64 m1 is composed of a wall portion protruding toward the front surface of the pachinko machine 10, and forms a guide path on the upper surface on which a game ball can roll. Further, above the first ordinary guide path 64m1, a fifth facing member 64t5 is provided so as to form a width through which a game ball can pass between the first ordinary guide path 64m1 and the first ordinary guide path 64m1. Even if the momentum of the game ball that flowed down the fifth guide path 64z10 was strong, it collided with the fifth facing member 64t5, and the game ball flowed down in the direction of the sixth discharge port 650a6 without being completely guided by the fifth facing member 64t5. Even so, it is guided to the sixth taxiing rotating member 64a6 by the first ordinary guide path 64m1 (preventing the game ball from reaching the sixth discharge port 650a6). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the fifth guide path 64z10 from reaching the sixth discharge port 650a6 without passing through the sixth taxiing rotation member 64a6. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged. Further, the game ball that has entered the second normal entry port 640s2 is also provided with the second normal guide path 64 m2 in the same manner as the game ball that has entered the first normal entry port 640s1. The second ordinary guideway 64m2 is also configured in the same manner as the first ordinary guideway 64m1.

Returning to FIG. 36, the description will be continued. On the right side of the game area, a first normal symbol start port 67s1 configured to allow the game ball to pass through and a second normal symbol start port 67s2 are provided directly below the first normal symbol start port 67s1. Two nails are arranged above the first normal symbol start port 67s1 so as to face each other, and by adjusting the inclination of the nails, the amount of game balls entering the first normal symbol start port 67s1 ( It is configured so that the ease of entering the ball) can be adjusted. Further, the first normal symbol start port 67s1 and the second normal symbol start port 67s2 have the same shape and are arranged in series on the upper and lower sides, and the game ball entering the first normal symbol start port 67s1 is the first. 2 The structure is such that it is easy to enter the ball into the normal symbol start port 67s2.

Further, in the second symbol display device 83, the first ordinary symbol display unit 83a and the second ordinary symbol starting port 67s2, in which the first ordinary symbol is variably displayed based on the starting prize for the first ordinary symbol starting port 67s1, are displayed. The second ordinary symbol display unit 83b for varyingly displaying the second ordinary symbol based on the starting prize is provided.

In the present embodiment, the first normal symbol start port 67s1 and the second normal symbol start port 67s2 are arranged in series in the upper and lower directions, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first normal symbol start port 67s1 and the second normal symbol start port 67s2 may be arranged in parallel in the left and right directions. The variable display device unit 80 may be sandwiched and arranged on the left and right sides of the game area, or may be appropriately arranged at a desired position.

FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. In the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, as shown in FIG. 42 (a), the random number table 202c per ordinary symbol is deleted from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and the random number table per first ordinary symbol is deleted. 202c1, a random number table 202c2 per second ordinary symbol, a status selection table 202k, and a random number setting table 202m are added, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 42 (c), the random number table 202c1 per first normal symbol is a normal symbol acquired when the game ball passes through the first normal symbol start port 67s1 in the normal game state (non-time saving game state). Regarding the hit random number counter C4, it is a data table in which the random number value of the normal symbol per random number counter C4 determined to be a hit is stored. In the present embodiment, as the random number value determined to be a hit, a value in the range of "5 to 7" is set as a hit random number value in the first ordinary symbol per random number table 202c1. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is composed of a pachinko machine 10 in which the time saving game is not set.

As shown in FIG. 42 (d), the random number table 202c2 per second normal symbol is a normal symbol acquired when the game ball passes through the second normal symbol start port 67s2 in the normal game state (non-time saving game state). Regarding the hit random number counter C4, it is a data table in which the random number value of the normal symbol per random number counter C4 determined to be a hit is stored. In the present embodiment, a value of "3" is set as a random number value in the second ordinary symbol per random number table 202c2 as a random number value determined to be a hit. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is composed of a pachinko machine 10 in which the time saving game is not set.

In the special hit type table 202b, instead of the jackpot A and the jackpot B, the jackpots C to F are set corresponding to the values of the special hit type counter C2 with respect to the special hit type table 202b in the first embodiment. There is. The jackpot C is a jackpot type selected when the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of 0 to 19. In the jackpot C, a jackpot game composed of 5 rounds is executed in the jackpot game. After the big hit, a random setting process (FIG. 60, S1232) is executed in which the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 of the distribution winning device 64 are set by lottery. After the jackpot game, a normal game state (non-time saving game state) is executed.

The jackpot D is a jackpot type selected when the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of 20 to 35. In the jackpot D, a jackpot game composed of 5 rounds is executed in the jackpot game. After the big hit, the random setting process (FIG. 60, S1232) for setting the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 of the distribution winning device 64 by lottery is not executed. After the jackpot game, a normal game state (non-time saving game state) is executed.

The jackpot E is a jackpot type selected when the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of 36 to 39. In the jackpot E, a jackpot game composed of 16R rounds is executed in the jackpot game, and after the jackpot, the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 of the distribution winning device 64 are randomly set by lottery. The setting process (FIG. 60, S1232) is not executed. After the jackpot game, a normal game state (non-time saving game state) is executed.

The jackpot F is a jackpot type selected when the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of 40 to 99. In the jackpot F, a jackpot game composed of 16 rounds is executed in the jackpot game, and after the jackpot, the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 of the distribution winning device 64 are randomly set by lottery. The setting process (FIG. 60, S1232) is executed. After the jackpot game, a normal game state (non-time saving game state) is executed.

As shown in FIG. 44A, the status selection table 202k is a data table in which the values of the distribution winning ball number counter 203e and the values of the status selection counter 203m, which will be described later, are assigned to the statuses A to E. .. In the status determination process (FIG. 53, S513) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when the value of the random counter 203q described later is the status change value (any of 0 to 39 in the present embodiment). From the status selection table 202k, the status type is determined based on the values of the distribution winning ball number counter 203e and the status selection counter 203m.

In the random number setting table 202m, as shown in FIG. 45B, when the number of game balls entered in the distribution winning device 64 set in the initial state is 0, 100, 200, or 255. This is a data table in which the value of the random counter 203p is set for each position information for each number of balls entered in the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8. Specifically, if the value of the random counter 203p is in the range of 0 to 24, the first to eighth swings when the number of balls entered into the distribution winning device 64 is 0 (or 256). The position information "10101010" of each of the minute rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 is selected. Similarly, if the value is in the range of 25 to 29, the respective position information "10001100" of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 when the number of balls entered is 100 is selected. If the value is in the range of 30 to 89, the respective position information "10111001" of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 when the number of balls entered is 200 is selected. If the value is in the range of 90 to 99, the respective position information "01010101" of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 when the number of balls entered is 255 is selected.

In the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol holding ball counter 203c, and the time saving medium counter 203d are deleted from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and the first normal symbol is deleted. Hold ball storage area 203b1, 2nd normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b2, 1st normal symbol hold ball number counter 203c1, 2nd normal symbol hold ball number counter 203c2, 1st normal power flag 203j1, 2nd normal power flag 203j2, The first general electric timer 203k1, the second general electric timer 203k2, the status selection counter 203m, the status storage area 203n, the random counter 203p, the distribution position storage area 203q, and the distribution maintenance flag 203r are added.

The first ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b1 is a storage area in which the random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 41) is stored in connection with the detection of the start winning prize in the first ordinary symbol start port 67s1. Is. When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 detects that the sphere has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67s1 (starting prize) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 49), it detects a random number per normal symbol from the counter buffer. The value of the counter C4 is acquired and stored in the first normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b1. The first ordinary symbol flag provided in the first ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b1 is set to ON and stored (stored). The first ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b1 stores four holding areas so that data (counter C4 value, first ordinary symbol flag) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (held) up to four times. Have. In the first ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b1, the data of the reserved balls in the order of passing through the first ordinary symbol starting port 67s1 (starting prize) is held in the earliest order of being digested in the holding area where the data is vacant. It is stored in order from the area (holding area corresponding to the number of holding balls).

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation display effect of the normal symbol, the MPU 201 executes the above-mentioned first normal pattern to execute processing such as a winning lottery and a display setting of the second symbol display device 83. Among the data corresponding to each start winning prize (value of the random number counter C4 per normal hit) stored in the symbol holding ball storage area 203b1, the data corresponding to one start winning is the data corresponding to the first normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b1. Shift to the first normal symbol holding ball execution area provided in. The shift in the present embodiment means moving the data stored in one area to another area.

The second normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b2 is a storage area in which the random number counter C4 per normal symbol acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 41) is stored when the start winning prize is detected in the second normal symbol start port 67s2. Since the configuration is the same as that of the first ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b1, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The game ball passes through the first normal symbol start port 67s1 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 49) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds in the first normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 (see FIG. 49). Based on the "starting prize" (hereinafter referred to as "starting prize"), the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the variable display effect (variable display effect performed by the second symbol display device 83) performed by the first symbol display device 37 is set. It is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The first normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first normal symbol starting port 67s1. Zero is set as the initial value by the initial setting process (FIG. 24, S1014) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, every time the starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the first normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is decremented by 1 each time the variation display effect is executed (see FIGS. 54 and S839).

The second normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls that the game ball has passed through the second normal symbol starting port 67s2 up to four times, and the first normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1. Since the configuration is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The first normal electric flag 203j1 is a flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the first normal entry port 640s1. In the normal entry port processing (FIG. 56, S116) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, it is set to ON based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first normal entry port 640s1. On the other hand, the value of the first normal electric timer 203k1 for measuring the time after the game ball passes through the first normal entrance 640s1 described later is a predetermined set value (5 seconds in this embodiment) or more. If it is determined that the time has passed, it is set to off. In the state where the RAM 203 is initialized, the first normal electric flag 203j1 is set to off.

The second normal electric flag 203j2 is a flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the second normal entry port 640s2. Although it differs in that it relates to the second normal entry port 640s2, the on / off setting is executed in the same manner as the first normal electric flag 203j1. The second normal power flag 203j2 is set to off when the second normal power timer 203k2 is determined to be equal to or higher than a predetermined set value (2s in this embodiment).

The first normal electric timer 203k1 is a timer for measuring the flow-down time after the game ball passes through the first normal entry port 640s1. In the normal entry port processing (FIG. 56, S116) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first normal entry port 640s1, it is set to 0, and then the first normal ball entry port is set to 0. 1 While the first normal electric flag 203j1 indicating that the game ball has passed through the normal entrance 640s1 is set to ON, 1 is added each time the normal entrance processing (FIGS. 56, S116) is executed. Will be updated. The first normal electric timer 203k1 is added by 1 every 2 ms, which is the execution cycle of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 49). The second normal electric timer 203k2 is a timer that measures the flow-down time after the game ball passes through the second normal entry port 640s2. Although it differs in that it relates to the second normal entry port 640s2, processing such as updating is executed in the same manner as the first normal electric timer 203k1. In the present embodiment, the first normal power timer 203k1 or the second normal power timer 203k2 is reset to 0 when the first normal power flag 203j1 or the second normal power flag 203j2 is set to ON, respectively. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the configuration may be reset to 0 when the first normal power flag 203j1 or the second normal power flag 203j2 is set to off.

The status selection counter 203m is a counter for selecting a status from the status selection table 202k shown in FIG. 44A. The status selection counter 203m is composed of a counter value updated in the range of "0 to 198". The status selection counter 203m is updated by adding one by one in the processing of S1210 of the main processing (FIG. 58, S1200) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. When 1 is added to the upper limit value of 198, the value is updated to 0, which is the initial value. In the initialized state of the RAM 203, it is set to 0, which is the initial value.

The random counter 203p selects the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 of the distribution winning device 64 set after the jackpot C and the jackpot F, which will be described later, from the random number table shown in FIG. 45 (b). It is a counter for. The random counter 203p is composed of a counter value updated in the range of “0 to 99”. The random counter 203p is added and updated one by one in the process of S1210 of the main process (FIG. 58, S1200) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. When 1 is added to the upper limit value of 99, the value is updated to 0, which is the initial value. In the state where the RAM 203 is initialized, the initial value 0 is set.

In the distribution position storage area 203q, each position information of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 at that time is stored in a state where there is no game ball flowing down inside the distribution winning device 64. It is a storage area. In each position information stored in the distribution position storage area 203q, the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 are changed in a state where the game ball does not flow down in the distribution winning device 64. It is used to monitor for fraudulent activities. Specifically, in the distribution error processing 2 (FIG. 62, S1320) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the difference between the distribution winning ball number counter 203e and the distribution discharge ball number counter 203f is 0 (that is,). When it is determined that there is no game ball flowing down in the distribution winning device 64), each position information of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 of the distribution winning device 64 at that time is stored. Will be done.

At this time, each position information stored in the distribution position storage area 203q is positive when rotated to the right with the distribution position confirmation sensor 262 as a positive rotation angle (the position where the magnets 64b1 to 64b8 face vertically upward as the origin). If the rotation angle is set to a negative rotation angle when rotated to the left), "1" is stored, and if the rotation angle is negative, "0" is stored. After 256 game balls have entered the distribution winning device 64 and won a prize in the first starting port 71, the position information of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 is the first distribution. It is stored as "10101010" in order from the position information of the rotating member 64a1.

The distribution maintenance flag 203r is a flag indicating that the game ball is not flowing down in the distribution winning device 64. The distribution maintenance flag 203r has a difference between the values of the distribution winning ball number counter 203e and the distribution discharge ball number counter 203f in the distribution error processing 2 (FIG. 59, S1320) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. When it is determined that the value is 0 (that is, the game ball is not flowing down in the distribution winning device 64), it is set to ON. On the other hand, in the distribution winning process 2 (FIG. 52, S112) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the ball entry port 640 in the distribution winning device 64, the ball is turned off. Set. When the RAM 203 is initialized, it is set to off.

The contents of the pseudo-variation table 222a and the background selection table 222b of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed with respect to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, respectively.

In the pseudo-variation table 222a of the first embodiment, pseudo-variation patterns are set for the values of the follow-up winning ball number counter 223d, whereas in the pseudo-variation table 222a of the present embodiment, the figure is shown. As shown in 44 (b), the point that the pseudo-variation pattern is set for the status of the sub-status storage area 223h stored based on the status command output by the main control device 110 is changed.

In the background selection table 222b of the first embodiment, the background pattern is set for each value of the follow-up winning ball number counter 223d, whereas in the background selection table 222b of the present embodiment, FIG. 45 ( As shown in a), the point that the background pattern is set for the status of the sub-status storage area 223h stored based on the status command output by the main control device 110 has been changed.

In the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, the follow-up winning ball count counter 223d, the follow-up winning ball count counter 223e, and the follow-up winning counter 223f are deleted from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. , Subordinate status storage area 223h, normal fluctuation flag 223i, and background change counter 223j are added respectively.

The slave status storage area 223h is a storage area in which the status type (status information) indicated by the received status command is stored based on the reception of the status command output from the main control device 110.

The normal fluctuation flag 223i is a flag indicating that the hit fluctuation pattern command of the normal symbol output by the main control device 110 has been received. In the command determination process 2 (FIG. 63, S1660) executed by the MPU 221 on the voice lamp control device 113, it is set to ON when it is determined that the hit variation pattern command of the normal symbol output from the main control unit 110 has been received. Will be done. On the other hand, in the pseudo fluctuation process 2 (FIG. 65, S1640) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, when the interrupt normal pseudo fluctuation pattern or the normal normal pseudo fluctuation pattern is set (S2024 or S2025), it is set to off. Will be done. When the RAM 223 is initialized, it is set to off.

The background change counter 223j is a counter value for determining whether or not to change the background pattern (background image) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The background change counter 223j is a counter value updated in the range of "0 to 99". In the process of S1615 of the main process (FIG. 62, S1600) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, 1 is added and updated. When 1 is added to the upper limit value of 99, it is updated to the initial value of 0. The background selection counter 223j is a counter value acquired in the background selection process 2 (FIG. 66, S1650) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described in the second embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process (FIG. 49) of the second embodiment replaces the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) of the first embodiment with the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S104), and the special symbol variation process 2 (FIGS. 50, S111) replaces the distribution winning process (FIG. 18, S105), and the distribution winning process 2 (FIG. 52, S112) replaces the normal symbol variation process (FIG. 21, S108). The symbol variation processing (FIGS. 54 and S113) and the second normal symbol variation processing (S114) are replaced by the through gate passage processing (FIGS. 22 and S109), and the through gate passage processing 2 (FIG. 55 and S115) is a normal entry. Mouth passage processing (FIGS. 56 and S116) has been added. The processes of S101 to S103, S107, and S110 to S111 in the second embodiment are the same as the processes of S101 to S103, S107, and S110 to S111 in the first embodiment.

In the second embodiment, the special symbol variation process 2 (S111), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. 50. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start processing 2 (FIG. 50, S111). The special symbol variation start process 2 (FIGS. 50, S111) of the second embodiment has a special symbol variation start process (FIGS. 16, S204) as opposed to the special symbol variation start process (FIGS. 15, S104) of the first embodiment. Instead of the special symbol variation start processing 2 (FIGS. 51, S310), the processing of S320 and S330 is added instead of the processing of S209 and S210, respectively. The processes of S201 to S207 and S211 in the second embodiment are the same as the processes of S201 to S207 and S211 in the first embodiment.

In the process of S203, when it is determined that new data is stored in the special symbol execution area 203a (S203: Yes), the special symbol variation start process 2 (FIG. 51, S310) is executed. The special symbol variation start processing 2 (FIG. 51, S310) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 51, but the processing necessary for starting the variation of the special symbol is executed.

Further, in the process of S208, it is determined what kind of jackpot is determined, and if it is jackpot C or jackpot D, the number of jackpot rounds is set to 5 rounds (S320). On the other hand, when the jackpot is E or the jackpot F, the number of jackpot rounds is set to 16 (S330). After that, the start of the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S211).

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, in the second embodiment, the special symbol variation process 2 (FIG. 50, S111), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110). The special symbol variation start process 2 (S310), which is one of the processes, will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process 2 (FIG. 51, S310). The special symbol variation start process 2 (FIG. 51, S310) of the second embodiment is a distribution device error notification control process (FIG. 17, S204) with respect to the special symbol variation start process (FIGS. 16, S204) of the first embodiment. S301) has been deleted. As for other processes, the same process as the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S204) in the first embodiment is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, in the second embodiment, the distribution winning process 2 (FIG. 52, S1112), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110). Will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the distribution winning process 2 (FIG. 52, S112). In the distribution winning process 2 (FIG. 52, S112) of the second embodiment, it is determined that the distribution winning process (FIG. 18, S105) in the first embodiment and the game ball have entered the distribution winning device 64. Then, the difference is that the process of whether or not to change the status is executed.

In the distribution winning process 2 (FIG. 52, S112), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the ball entry port 640 of the distribution winning device 64 (S511). When it is determined that the game ball has entered the ball entry port 640 (S511: Yes), the distribution maintenance flag 203r is set to off (S512). After that, the status determination process is executed (S513). The details of the status determination process (S513) will be described later with reference to FIG. 53. However, it is determined whether or not the condition for changing the status type is satisfied, and if the condition is satisfied, the status type is determined. The process of determining is executed.

The value of the distribution winning ball number counter 203e is acquired (S514). 1 is added to the value of the acquired distribution winning ball number counter 203e and updated (S515). When the value of the acquired distribution winning ball number counter 203e is the upper limit value 255, adding 1 updates the value to 0, which is the initial value. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the ball entry port 640 (S511: No), this process ends.

It is determined whether the value of the updated distribution winning ball number counter 203e is the set counter value (in the present embodiment, 0 is updated by adding 1 from 255) (S516). That is, it is determined whether the game ball that has entered the ball entry port 640 is a game ball that will win a prize in the first start port 71. When it is determined that the value is the setting counter value (S516: Yes), the value of the distribution winning timer 203g is set to 0 (S517). That is, the measurement start is set as the time from when the game ball that will enter the first start port 71 enters the entry port 640 until the game ball enters the first start port 71. The distribution winning flag 203h is set to on (S518). After that, this process ends.

In the present embodiment, the distribution maintenance flag 203r is set to off regardless of whether it is on or off each time the game ball enters the entry port 640, but only when it is on. Of course, it may be configured to be set to off.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the status determination process (S513), which is one of the distribution winning processes 2 (FIGS. 52 and S112) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described in the second embodiment. do. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this status determination process (S513).

In the status determination process (FIG. 53, S513), first, the value of the random counter 203p is acquired (S521). It is determined whether the acquired value of the random counter 203p is a status change value (any of 0 to 39 in this embodiment) (S522). If it is determined to be the status change value (S522: Yes), the value of the status selection counter 203m is acquired (S523). Based on the acquired values of the status selection counter 203m and the distribution winning ball number counter 203e, the status type is determined from the status selection table 202k (FIG. 44A) (S524). A status command is set (generated) based on the determined status type (S525). On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired value of the random counter 203p is not the status change value (S522: No), this process ends.

In this way, every time the game ball enters the entrance 640 of the distribution winning device 64, whether or not to change (determine or update) the status is determined by lottery, so that the status is random. It can be changed at the opportunity.

Further, in the status selection table 202k, the ratio of the selected status types is changed according to the value of the distribution winning ball number counter 203e. Further, since the pseudo fluctuation pattern of the pseudo symbol selected by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is set so that the ratio of the type of the pseudo fluctuation pattern selected differs depending on the type of status, the player can display the fluctuation. It is possible to predict the number of game balls that have entered the current distribution winning device 64 by the pseudo-variation pattern of the pseudo symbol. Therefore, in addition to hitting the special symbol, the player's enjoyment increases and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, in the status selection table 202k, the distribution winning ball is also easily selected in the range of 200 to 255 in which the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e is close to the value at which the first starting port 71 is to be won. Since the value of the number counter 203e is configured to be selected even if it is a low value (for example, a value in the range of 0 to 60), when the status E is selected, the player can receive the first starting port. You can expect that it will be close to winning 71.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the first ordinary symbol variation process (S113), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described in the second embodiment. do. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the first ordinary symbol variation processing (S113). The first ordinary symbol variation processing (FIGS. 54 and S113) includes variation display of the first ordinary symbol performed by the first ordinary symbol display unit 83a of the second symbol display device 83 and the first blade of the first ordinary electric accessory. This is a process for controlling the opening time of 64s1 and the like.

In this first ordinary symbol variation processing (FIG. 54, S113), first, it is determined whether or not the present is the hit of the first ordinary symbol. (S831). As for the hitting of the first ordinary symbol, the opening / closing control of the first blade 64s1 of the ordinary electric accessory is performed after the indication indicating the hit is made on the first ordinary symbol display unit 83a of the second symbol display device 83. Up to the middle is included. If it is determined that the first normal symbol is hit (S831: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first ordinary symbol is not hit (S831: No), it is determined whether the first ordinary symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being displayed in a variable manner (S832). When it is determined that the first ordinary symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S832: Yes), the variation time of the first ordinary symbol executed in the first ordinary symbol display unit 83a of the second symbol display device 83 is determined. It is determined whether or not it has passed (S833). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S848, which will be described later, before the fluctuation display is started on the first normal symbol display unit 83a of the second symbol display device 83. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern of the first ordinary symbol is set with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds for both the hit fluctuation pattern and the miss fluctuation pattern.

In the process of S833, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S833: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S833, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the first normal symbol that is variablely displayed has elapsed (S833: Yes), the first normal symbol display unit of the second symbol display device 83 The stop display of 83a is set (S834). In the process of S834, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S844, the "○" symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83 as the first ordinary symbol. Is set to be displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery of the first ordinary symbol is missed and the display mode at the time of the loss is set by the process of S847, the "x" symbol is displayed on the first ordinary symbol display unit 83a of the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be stopped (lit). When the stop display is set by the process of S8034, the variation display in the first normal symbol display unit 83a of the second symbol display device 83 ends, and the display mode is stopped in the display mode set in the process of S844 and the process of S847. The symbol is stopped and displayed (lit) on the first ordinary symbol display unit 83a of the second symbol display device 83.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the first ordinary symbol this time is a win (S835). When it is determined that the lottery result of the first ordinary symbol is a hit (S835: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the first blade 64s1 of the first ordinary electric accessory is set (836). On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result of the first ordinary symbol this time is out of order (S835: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S832, when it is determined that the first normal symbol is not in the variable display (S832: No), the value of the first normal symbol hold ball counter 203c1 (hold of the variable display in the first normal symbol). The number of times M) is acquired (S837).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M1) of the first normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is larger than 0 (S838). When it is determined that the value (M1) of the first normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is 0 (S838: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M1) of the first ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is not 0 (S838: Yes), the value (M1) of the first ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is subtracted by 1. (S839).

Next, the data stored in the first ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b1 is shifted (S840). In the process of S840, the data stored in the first normal symbol hold 1 to the first normal symbol hold 4 of the first normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b1 is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first normal symbol hold 1 → execution area, the first normal symbol hold 2 → the first normal symbol hold 1, the first normal symbol hold 3 → the first normal symbol hold 2, the first normal symbol hold 4 → Shift the data in each area, such as 1st normal symbol hold 3. After shifting the data, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the first normal symbol holding ball execution area is acquired (S841).

The hit / fail determination result is acquired (S842) based on the hit determination value of the first ordinary symbol per random number table 202c1 (FIG. 42 (c)). It is determined whether the acquired lottery result is a win (S843). If it is determined to be a hit (S843: Yes), the display mode of "○", which is the display mode at the time of hit to be displayed on the first normal symbol display unit 83a of the second symbol display device 83, is set. (S844). The hit variation pattern command of the normal symbol (in the present embodiment, there is only one type of the hit variation pattern command of the normal symbol, and the command indicating the hit of the first normal symbol) is set (generated).

The opening time and the number of times of the first blade 64s1 of the first ordinary electric accessory are set to 0.5 seconds and once (S846). On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired lottery result is out of order (S843: No), the out-of-order display mode is displayed on the first ordinary symbol display unit 83a of the second symbol display device 83. The display mode of "x", which is the display mode of "x", is set. The fluctuation time of the first normal symbol is set to 30 seconds.

Regarding the second ordinary symbol variation processing (S114), the second ordinary symbol display unit 83b of the second symbol display device 83 performs the second ordinary symbol variation processing (S114, S113) with respect to the first ordinary symbol variation processing (FIGS. 54 and S113). The only difference is that the variation display of the symbol and the opening time of the second blade 64s2 of the second ordinary electric accessory are controlled, and the same control is executed. Therefore, the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted. The fluctuation time of the second ordinary symbol is the same as that of the first ordinary symbol, and the same value is set for the opening time and the number of times of the second blade 64s2 of the second ordinary electric accessory. Further, the first ordinary symbol and the second ordinary symbol are configured to be capable of variable display at the same time. Further, the first blade 64s1 of the first ordinary electric accessory and the second blade 64s2 of the second ordinary electric accessory are configured so that the opening control can be executed at the same time.

As described above, the opening time and the number of times of the first blade 64s1 of the first ordinary electric accessory and the second blade 64s2 of the second ordinary electric accessory are set to 0.5 seconds and once, so that they are opened. Even if it is done, the length is set so that one game ball can be played. Therefore, when a plurality of game balls enter the first normal entry port 640s1 or the second normal entry port 640s2 at the same time, ball clogging may occur or a big hit may be extremely likely to occur. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the fluctuation time of the first normal symbol and the second normal symbol is set to be relatively long as 30 seconds, it takes time for the first normal symbol and the second normal symbol to stop fluctuating, and the first normal symbol and the first normal symbol and the second normal symbol and the second normal symbol have a relatively long fluctuation time. The number of lottery of the second ordinary symbol becomes extremely large, and the first blade 64s1 of the first ordinary electric accessory or the second blade 64s2 of the second ordinary electric accessory frequently opens, and the first starting port is extremely opened. It is possible to prevent the 71 from becoming easy to win.

Further, since the first normal symbol start port 67s1 and the second normal symbol start port 67s2 are arranged side by side in series in the upper and lower directions, they pass through the first normal symbol start port 67s1 and the second normal symbol start port 67s2 at the same time. The first ordinary symbol and the second ordinary symbol can be easily configured to start fluctuating at the same time. Therefore, since the fluctuation times of the first normal symbol and the second normal symbol are set to be the same, the determination result is likely to be displayed at the same time, and the player can easily display the fluctuation display result of the first normal symbol and the second normal symbol. It can be easily seen.

With reference to FIG. 55, the through gate passage process 2 (S115), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described in the second embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process 2 (S115). In the through gate passing process 2 (FIGS. 55 and S115) of the second embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the first normal symbol starting port 67s1 and the second normal symbol starting port 67s2, respectively, and it is determined that the game balls have passed. If so, the processing when passing is executed for each.

In the through gate passing process 2 (FIG. 55, S115), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the first normal symbol starting port 67s1 (S921). When it is determined that the game ball has passed the first normal symbol start port 67s1 (S921: Yes), the value of the first normal symbol hold ball counter 203c1 is acquired (S922). It is determined whether the acquired value is less than the upper limit value of 4 (S923). When it is determined that the acquired value is less than 4 (S923: Yes), 1 is added to the acquired value of the first ordinary symbol hold ball counter 203c1, and the added value is the first ordinary symbol hold. It is stored in the ball number counter 203c1 (S924). The value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol is acquired and stored (stored) in the corresponding holding area of the first ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b1 (S925). On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the first normal symbol starting port 67s1 (S921: No), the value of the first normal symbol reserved ball counter 203c1 is 4 or more (that is, the upper limit value 4). ), The process of S926 is executed (S923: No).

It is determined whether the game ball has passed through the second normal symbol start port 67s2 (S926). When it is determined that the game ball has passed the second normal symbol start port 67s2 (S926: Yes), the value of the second normal symbol hold ball counter 203c2 is acquired (S927). It is determined whether the acquired value is less than the upper limit value of 4 (S928). If it is determined that the acquired value is less than 4 (S928: Yes), 1 is added to the acquired value of the second normal symbol hold ball counter 203c2, and the added value is the second symbol hold. It is stored in the ball number counter 203c2 (S929). The value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol is acquired and stored (stored) in the corresponding holding area of the second ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b2 (S930). On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the second normal symbol starting port 67s2 (S926: No), the value of the second normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is 4 or more (that is, the upper limit value 4). ) Is determined (S928: No), this process is terminated.

With reference to FIG. 56, a normal ball slot process (S116), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described in the second embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this normal entrance processing (S116). In the normal ball entry processing (FIGS. 56, S116) in the second embodiment, when a game ball enters the first normal entry port 640s1 and the second normal entry port 640s2, the ball enters the flow of the game ball. It is determined whether the entered game ball is discharged from the 6th discharge port 650a6 to the 8th discharge port 650a8, or a time longer than the time for winning the first start port 71 has elapsed. After that, a process of correcting to the value of the distribution winning ball number counter 203e when one game ball is guided to the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6 or one game ball is guided to the eighth distribution rotation member 64a8 is executed. do.

In the normal entry port processing (FIG. 56, S116), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first normal entry port 640s1 (S951). When it is determined that the game ball has entered the first normal ball entry port 640s1 (S951: Yes), the first normal electric flag 203j1 is set to ON (S952). After that, the first normal electric timer 203k1 is set to 0 (S953).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first normal entry port 640s1 (S951: No), it is determined whether the first normal electric flag 203j1 is on (S954). When it is determined that the first normal power flag 203j1 is on (S954: Yes), the value of the first normal power timer 203k1 is incremented by 1 and updated (S955). It is determined whether the updated value exceeds the set value (5s in this embodiment) (S956). When it is determined that the updated value exceeds the set value (S956: Yes), the first normal electric flag 203j1 is set to off (S957). After that, the first distribution correction process is executed (S958). The details of the first distribution correction process (S958) will be described later with reference to FIG. 57, but since the game ball has entered from the first normal entry port 640s1, the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e Since a deviation occurs in each position of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 of the distribution winning device 64, a process for correcting the deviation is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first ordinary electric flag 203j1 is off (S954: No), and when it is determined that the value of the first ordinary electric timer 203k1 is equal to or less than the set value (S956: No), The process of S959 is executed. In the process of S959, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the second normal entry port 640s2 (S959). When it is determined that the game ball has passed the second normal entry port 640s2 (S959: Yes), the second normal electric flag 203j2 is set to ON (S960). After that, the second normal electric timer 203k2 is set to 0 (S961).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the second normal entry port 640s2 (S959: No), it is determined whether the second normal electric flag 203j2 is on (S962). When it is determined that the second normal power flag 203j2 is on (S962: Yes), the value of the second normal power timer 203k2 is incremented by 1 and updated (S963). It is determined whether the value of the second normal electric timer 203k2 exceeds the set value (2s in this embodiment) (S964). When it is determined that the value of the second normal power timer 203k2 exceeds the set value (S964: Yes), the second normal power flag 203j2 is set to off (S965). The second distribution correction process is executed (S966). In the second distribution correction process (S966), in the process of S972 of the first distribution correction process (FIGS. 57, S958), the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6 is changed to the eighth distribution rotation member 64a8. Since the same processing is executed for other processing only differently, the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 57, in the second embodiment, the first distribution correction process (FIG. 57, S958), which is one process of the normal entry port process (FIG. 56, S116) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. ) Will be explained. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the first distribution correction process (S958).

In the first distribution correction process (FIG. 57, S958), first, when one game ball is guided to the position of the sixth distribution rotating member 64a6 corresponding to the value of the current distribution winning ball number counter 203e. The value of the corresponding distribution winning ball number counter 203e is calculated (S971). Here, for example, it is assumed that the value of the current distribution winning ball number counter 203e is "100". Since the position data of the 1st to 8th distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 corresponding to the value "100" of the distribution winning ball number counter 203e is "10001100", the 6th distribution rotation member 64a6 is accommodated in the first position. The portion 64c6 is in a state of facing upward. In this case, when the game ball enters from the first normal ball entry port 640s1 and the game ball is guided to the sixth taxiing rotation member 64a6, the game ball enters the first accommodating portion 64c6 and the sixth taxiing. The rotating member 64a6 rotates to the left to guide the game ball to the sixth guide path 64z12.

The game ball guided to the sixth guide path 64z12 is guided to the seventh taxiing rotating member 64a7. Since the second taxiing portion 64a7 is at a position where the second accommodating portion 64d7 faces upward, the game ball enters the second accommodating portion 64d7 and rotates to the right to enter the seventh guide path 64z14. To induce. The game ball guided to the seventh guide path guides the game ball to the eighth taxiing rotation member 64a8. At this time, the eighth taxiing rotating member 64a8 is in a state in which the second accommodating portion 64d8 faces upward, so that the game ball enters the second accommodating portion 64d8 and rotates to the right to rotate the eighth discharge guide path. The game ball is guided to 64z15 and is discharged from the eighth discharge port 650a8.

As a result, when the game ball enters from the first normal entry port 640s1 when the value of the distribution winning ball number counter 203e is 100, the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6 has the second accommodating portion 64d6. The seventh distribution rotating member 64a7 is changed to the position where the first accommodating portion c7 and the eighth distribution rotating member 64a8 are changed to the positions where the first accommodating portion c8 faces upward. Each position information of the rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 becomes "10001011", and it is calculated that the position corresponds to the value 132 of the distribution winning ball number counter 203e.

Next, the value is updated to the value of the distribution winning ball number counter 203e calculated in the process of S971 (S972). The value of the distribution discharge ball number counter 203f is also updated with the same value as the updated distribution winning ball number counter (S973).

As a result, when a game ball enters from the first normal entry port 640s1, the value of the distribution winning ball number counter 203e and the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 are deviated from each other. Since the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e is corrected based on each position of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8, the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e is set to the correct value in the subsequent processing. Processing can be performed based on this, and the occurrence of defects can be suppressed. In addition, it is possible to suppress a problem in which a prize is determined as an illegal prize even though the first starting port 71 is won in a regular game due to the occurrence of the deviation.

Further, since the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203f is also corrected to match the corrected value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e, the distribution winning ball is executed even though the normal game is performed. The difference between the value of the number counter 203e and the value of the distribution discharge ball number counter 203f is determined to be an abnormality in the distribution error processing 2 (FIGS. 61, S1320) described later (10 in this embodiment). It is possible to prevent the problem determined to be the above.

In the present embodiment, the correction of the distribution winning ball number counter 203e and the distribution discharge ball number counter 203f is performed by calculation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there is no game ball in the distribution winning device 64. When it is determined that, each position of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 at that time is detected, and the value of the distribution winning ball number counter 203e corresponding to that position is calculated. It may be configured to be corrected. With this configuration, it is possible to correct to a more accurate value.

Further, in the present embodiment, by setting the opening time and the number of times of the first blade 64s1 of the first ordinary electric accessory to 0.5 seconds and once, only one ball enters the first ordinary entry port 640s1. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and a game ball cannot directly enter the first normal entry port 640s1 (for example, when the first ordinary electric accessory is open, the first normal entry port 640s1 is used. The upper surface of the first blade 64s1 of the first ordinary electric accessory has a recess that can hold one game ball. Is formed, and when the first blade 64s1 is closed (the protruding piece that is regulated by closing is released) with the game ball entering the recess, the recess is formed from the first normal entry port 640s1. The held game ball may be configured to enter the ball. By doing so, it is possible to more reliably suppress the problem that a plurality of game balls enter the first normal entry port 640s1 with one opening.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first blade 64s1 of the first ordinary electric accessory and the second blade 64s2 of the second ordinary electric accessory correspond to the first ordinary symbol and the second ordinary symbol, respectively. Not limited to this, the first blade 64s1 and the second blade 64s2 may be configured to correspond to one ordinary symbol and be opened at the same time. Further, the blades to be opened may be changed depending on the symbol type of one ordinary symbol. With this configuration, the two blades open at the same time, so that the player can greatly expect the game ball to enter the first normal entrance 64s1 or the second entrance 64s2. In addition, the game can be played with a sense of expectation as to which blade will be opened. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

The main process (S1200) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing this main process (S1200). The main process (FIG. 58, S1200) of the second embodiment is different from the main process (FIG. 27, S1200) of the first embodiment, instead of the jackpot control process (S1203), the jackpot control process 2 (FIG. 59, S1220). However, instead of the distribution error processing (FIG. 28, S1207), the distribution error processing 2 (FIG. 61, S1320) has been added. The processes of S1201 to S1202, S1204 to S1206, and S1208 to S1214 in the second embodiment are the same as the processes of S1201 to S1202, S1204 to S1206, and S1208 to S1214 in the first embodiment. When the process of S1202 is completed, the jackpot control process 2 (FIG. 59, S1220) is executed.

The jackpot control process 2 (S1220), which is one of the main processes (FIG. 58, S1200) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 2 (S1220). The jackpot control process 2 (FIG. 59, S1200) executes a process of opening and closing the variable winning device 65 depending on the state of the jackpot game, and at the end of the jackpot game, the distribution winning device 64 according to the executed jackpot type. A process of setting the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 at positions corresponding to the number of balls entered determined by lottery is executed.

In the jackpot control process 2 (FIG. 59, S1220), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game has started (S1221). When it is determined that the jackpot game has started (S1221: Yes), an opening command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the start of the jackpot game is set (generated). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot game has not started (S1221: No), it is determined whether the jackpot game is in progress (S1223). If it is determined that the jackpot game is not in progress (S1223: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (S1223: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1224). When it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1224: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a (large opening) is opened by the operation of the variable winning device 65 (S1225). A round number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the number of newly started rounds is set. After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1224: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65a (large opening opening) is satisfied (S1227). Here, the closing condition is whether a predetermined number of game balls (10 in this embodiment) have been won in the specific winning opening 65a, or whether 30 seconds have passed since the opening was established. Is set to.

When it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (S1227: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a (large opening) is closed by the operation of the variable winning device 65 (S1228). After that, this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing condition is not satisfied (S1229: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1229). The ending effect is set when the preset number of rounds is completed.

When it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1229: Yes), an ending command for notifying the end of the jackpot game is set to the voice lamp control device 113 (S1230). It is determined whether the executed jackpot type is jackpot C or jackpot F (S1231). That is, in the jackpot type that executes the random setting process in which the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 of the distribution winning device 64 after the jackpot game are set at positions corresponding to the number of winning balls determined by lottery. It is determined whether there is.

When it is determined that the executed jackpot type is jackpot C or jackpot F (S1231: Yes), the random setting process is executed (S1232). The details of the random setting process (S1232) will be described later with reference to FIG. 60, but from the random number setting table 202m (see FIG. 45 (b)), the first to eighth distribution winning devices 64a1 after the jackpot game The process of setting the position of ~ 64a8 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the executed jackpot type is jackpot D or jackpot E (S1231: No), this process is terminated.

A random setting process (S1232), which is one process of the jackpot control process 2 (FIGS. 59, S1220) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this random setting process (S1232).

In the random setting process (FIG. 60, S1232), first, the value of the random counter 203p is acquired (S1241). Based on the acquired value of the random counter 203p, the set positions of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 are determined (selected) from the random number setting table 202m (S1242). Based on the determined set position, the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 are set, respectively (S1243). The values of the distribution winning ball number counter 203e and the distribution discharge ball number counter 203f are set to the values corresponding to the determined set positions (S1244).

In this way, when the jackpot game is executed, in the case of jackpot C or jackpot F, the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to the positions determined by lottery after the jackpot game and corresponding to the number of balls entered. 64a8 is set respectively. Therefore, the player plays a jackpot game with the expectation that the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 are hits determined by lottery, and if it is a jackpot C or a jackpot F, , You can play the game with the expectation that it will be set to the set position corresponding to the number of balls entered as large as possible.

In addition, since it is difficult for the player to determine how many balls are set in the distribution winning device 64 after the big hit, it is a little more until the number of balls to be won in the first starting port 71. You can play the game with the expectation that it will not happen.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, even during the jackpot game, the ball is guided into the ball entry port 640 of the distribution winning device 64 by the tapered surface 65s formed on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate of the variable winning device 65. It has an easy structure. Therefore, since the jackpot C or the jackpot D is a jackpot of 5 rounds, the jackpot game time is short and the number of game balls entering the entry port 640 is small. Therefore, the player strongly expects the jackpot C to be executed the random setting process (FIG. 60, S1232) in the case of the jackpot of 5 rounds. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot E or a jackpot F, which is a jackpot of 16 rounds, a certain amount of game balls will enter the entrance 640, so even if it is not a jackpot F, the next number It is possible to reduce the number of balls required before the number of balls to be won in one starting port 71. Therefore, the player can get the next big hit at an early stage and can prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, when the value of the random counter 202p meets 90 to 99 in the random number setting table 202m, it is set when the number of balls entered is 255. Therefore, the ball is entered in the distribution winning device 64 next. In that case, the game ball wins the first starting port 71, and a continuous jackpot can be given to the player. Therefore, the player can obtain a large number of game balls in a shorter time, and the taste of the game can be improved.

In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not to execute the random setting process (FIG. 60, S1232) depending on the type of jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a specific winning opening is made to win after the jackpot game, and a lottery based on the prize is drawn. May be configured to determine whether to execute the random setting process (FIG. 60, S1232). With this configuration, the player himself can enjoy the feeling of having performed a lottery, and can increase the enjoyment of the jackpot game.

With reference to FIG. 61, the distribution error processing 2 (FIGS. 61, S1320), which is one of the main processing (S1200) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described in the second embodiment. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the distribution error processing process 2 (S1320). In the distribution error processing 2 (FIG. 61, S1320) of the second embodiment, the processing of S1321 to S1322 and S1324 to S1326 is added to the distribution error processing (FIG. 28, S1207) of the first embodiment. There is. The processes of S1323 and S1327 to S1332 in the second embodiment are the same as the processes of S1301 to S1307 in the first embodiment.

In the process of S1321, it is determined whether or not the distribution maintenance flag 203r is set to ON (S1321). When it is determined that the distribution maintenance flag 203r is set to ON (S1321: Yes), the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 are stored in the distribution position storage area 203q. It is determined whether or not the data matches the existing position data (position information) (S1322). If it is determined that they match (S1322: Yes), an error notification command is set (S1323). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to the eighth distribution rotation member 64a8 and the values of the distribution position storage area 203q do not match (S1322: No), S1327. Processing is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the distribution maintenance flag 203r is off (S1321: No), the process of S1324 is executed. In the process of S1324, it is determined whether the value of the distribution winning ball number counter 203e and the value of the distribution discharge ball number counter 203f match (that is, whether the difference between the values is 0) (S1324). If it is determined that they match (that is, the difference is 0) (S1324: Yes), the distribution maintenance flag 203r is set to ON (S1325). After that, the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 are stored as position data (position information) in the distribution position storage area 203q. This position data is stored in the same manner as the position data of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 in the random number setting table 202m shown in FIG. 45 (b). Since the processing of S1327 to S1332 is the same processing as the distribution error processing 2 (FIG. 28, S1207) in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, when it is determined that the game ball is not flowing down in the distribution winning device 64, each position of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 at that time is stored. By collating the positions of the game balls until the game balls are newly entered in the distribution winning device 64, the first to first steps are made in a state where the game balls have not won the distribution winning device 64. It is possible to monitor whether the eight distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 have rotated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraudulent movement of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 from the outside. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first starting port 71 from being illegally won a prize, and it is possible to reduce the damage caused by the illegality.

The main process (S1600) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this main process (S1600). The main process (FIG. 62, S1600) of the second embodiment replaces the variable display setting process (FIG. 33, S1611) with respect to the main process (FIG. 30, S1600) of the first embodiment, and the variable display setting process 2 (FIG. 64, S1630) replaces the pseudo-variation process (FIGS. 34, S1612), and the pseudo-variation process 2 (FIG. 65, S1640) replaces the background selection process (FIG. 35, S1613). 66, S1650), instead of the command determination process (FIGS. 31, S1614), the command determination process 2 (FIG. 63, S1660) is added. The processes of S1601 to S1610 and S1615 to S1620 in the second embodiment are the same as the processes of S1601 to S1610 and S1615 to S1620 in the first embodiment. For convenience, the command determination process 2 (FIG. 63, S1660) executed after the background selection process 2 (FIG. 66, S1650) will be described.

With reference to FIG. 63, the command determination process 2 (S1660), which is one of the main processes (FIG. 62, S1600) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described in the second embodiment. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S1660). The command determination process 2 (FIG. 63, S1660) of the second embodiment replaces each process of S1707 to S1712 with respect to the command determination process (FIG. 31, S1614) of the first embodiment, and each process of S1727 to S1730. Has been added. The processes S1721 to S1726 and S1731 to S1735 in the second embodiment are the same as the processes S1701 to S1706 and S1713 to S1717 in the first embodiment.

If it is determined in the process of S1724 that the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S1724; No), the process of S1727 is executed. In the process of S1727, it is determined whether or not the hit variation pattern command of the normal symbol output by the main control device 110 has been received (S1727). When it is determined that the hit variation pattern command of the ordinary symbol is received (S1727: Yes), the ordinary variation flag 223i is set to ON (S1728).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit variation pattern command of the normal symbol has not been received (S1727: No), it is determined whether or not the status command output by the main control device 110 has been received (S1729). When it is determined that the status command has been received (S1729: Yes), the status type is extracted from the received status command and stored in the subordinate status storage area 223h (S1730). On the other hand, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (S1729: No), the process of S1731 is executed. Since each process from S1731 to S1735 is the same process as the command determination process (FIG. 31, S1614) in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the variation display setting process 2 (S1630), which is one of the main processes (FIG. 62, S1600) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described in the second embodiment. do. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process 2 (S1630). The variation display setting process 2 (FIG. 64, S1630) of the second embodiment replaces each process of S1903 to S1907 with respect to the variation display setting process (FIG. 33, S1611) of the first embodiment, and is described in S1923 to S1928. Each process has been added. The processes S1921 to S1922 and S1929 to S1935 in the second embodiment are the same as the processes S1901 to S1902 and S1908 to S1912 in the first embodiment.

When the process of S1922 is executed, the process of S1923 is executed. In the process of S1923, it is determined whether any of the precursor A to precursor C pseudo-variation patterns is variable-displayed (dynamically displayed) by the third symbol display device 81 (S1923). When it is determined that any of the precursors A to C pseudo-variation patterns is not displayed as variation (S1923: No), the variation pattern extracted by the process of S1723 of the command determination process 2 (FIG. 63, S1660) is acquired. Is done (S1924). The variation pattern selected at this time is a variation display mode in which the variation display of the special symbol as shown in FIG. 11A is executed. Since the detailed contents are the same as those already described in the first embodiment, they will be omitted.

On the other hand, when it is determined that any of the precursor A to C pseudo-variation patterns is variablely displayed (S1923: Yes), the type of the precursor pseudo-variation pattern that is variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is It is determined what it is (S1925). When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern displayed in the fluctuation is the precursor A pseudo fluctuation pattern, the continuous A fluctuation pattern is acquired as the fluctuation pattern (dynamic display mode) of the special symbol (S1926).

Here, the precursor A pseudo fluctuation pattern and the continuous A fluctuation pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 46 (a). In the precursor A fluctuation pattern of the pseudo symbol, the left, middle, and right pseudo symbols (numbers 1 to 9 in this embodiment) start the fluctuation display at high speed in ascending order (not shown). Next, the symbols having the same number on the left and right pseudo symbols are stopped and displayed, and the "reach" sound is output from the audio output device 226. Then, the pseudo pattern is reduced to the upper left and displayed, and an image of the hero climbing toward a high mountain is displayed (Fig. 46, upper figure). After that, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 71 and the variable display of the special symbol is started in the continuous A fluctuation pattern, the pseudo symbol displayed in the upper left is replaced as the special symbol as it is, and the hero An image of climbing to the top of the mountain is displayed. After that, as shown in the lower figure of FIG. 46 (a), the special symbol displayed in the upper left in the reach state is displayed in the center of the third symbol display device 81, and the "heavenly world reached !!" is displayed below the special symbol. The characters are displayed. After that, the special symbol is stopped and displayed at "777", and is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode for notifying that a big hit has been made. On the other hand, in the precursor A pseudo-variation pattern, if the fluctuation display of the switching A fluctuation pattern does not start even after the fluctuation time elapses, the hero does not reach the top of the mountain and uses a pseudo-symbol different from the left and right pseudo-symbols. The middle symbol stops and the variable display ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern displayed in the fluctuation is the precursor B pseudo fluctuation pattern, the continuous B fluctuation pattern is acquired as the fluctuation pattern (dynamic display mode) of the special symbol (S1927).

Here, the precursor B pseudo-variation pattern and the continuous B fluctuation pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 46 (b). In the precursor B fluctuation pattern of the pseudo symbol, the left, middle, and right pseudo symbols (numbers 1 to 9 in this embodiment) start the fluctuation display at high speed in ascending order (not shown). Next, the symbols having the same number on the left and right pseudo symbols are stopped and displayed, and the "reach" sound is output from the audio output device 226. Then, the pseudo pattern is reduced to the upper left and displayed, the hero is displayed, and an image in which the hero jumps toward the sky is displayed. After that, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 71 and the variation display of the special symbol is started in the continuous B variation pattern, the pseudo symbol displayed in the upper left is replaced as a special symbol as it is, and the hero The image that reaches above the clouds is displayed. After that, as shown in the lower figure of FIG. 46 (b), the special symbol displayed in the upper left in the reach state is displayed in the center of the third symbol display device 81, and the "heavenly world reached !!" is displayed below the special symbol. The characters are displayed. After that, the special symbol is stopped and displayed at "777", and is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode for notifying that a big hit has been made. On the other hand, in the precursor B pseudo-variation pattern, if the fluctuation display of the switching b fluctuation pattern does not start even after the fluctuation time elapses, the middle symbol is a pseudo-symbol different from the left and right pseudo-symbols without the main character reaching above the clouds. Stops and the fluctuation display ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern displayed in the fluctuation is the precursor C pseudo fluctuation pattern, the continuous C fluctuation pattern is acquired as the fluctuation pattern (dynamic display mode) of the special symbol (S1928).

Here, the precursor C pseudo-variation pattern and the continuous C fluctuation pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 47. In the precursor C fluctuation pattern of the pseudo symbol, the left, middle, and right pseudo symbols (numbers 1 to 9 in this embodiment) start the fluctuation display at high speed in ascending order (not shown). Next, the symbols having the same number on the left and right pseudo symbols are stopped and displayed, and the "reach" sound is output from the audio output device 226. Then, the pseudo pattern is reduced to the upper left and displayed, an image of the closed door is displayed, and an image in which the closed door is slightly opened and closed is displayed. After that, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 71 and the variation display of the special symbol is started in the continuous A variation pattern, the pseudo symbol displayed in the upper left is replaced as it is as a special symbol and closed. An image with the door open is displayed. After that, as shown in the lower figure of FIG. 47, the special symbol displayed in the upper left in the reach state is displayed in the center of the third symbol display device 81, and the characters "reached the heavens !!" are displayed below it. Will be done. After that, the special symbol is stopped and displayed at "777", and is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode for notifying that a big hit has been made. On the other hand, in the precursor C pseudo fluctuation pattern, if the fluctuation display of the switching C fluctuation pattern is not started even after the fluctuation time elapses, the closed door is not opened and the pseudo is different from the left and right pseudo symbols. The middle symbol stops at the symbol and the variable display ends.

Since each process from S1929 to S1935 is the same as the process already described in the variable display setting process (FIG. 33, S1611) of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the pseudo-variation process 2 (S1640), which is one of the main processes (FIG. 62, S1600) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described in the second embodiment. .. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the pseudo-variation process 2 (S1640).

In the pseudo-variation process 2 (FIG. 65, S1640), first, it is determined in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 whether or not the special symbol is in the variation display (S2021). If it is determined that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S2021: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is stopped and displayed (2021: No), it is determined whether or not the normal fluctuation flag 223i is set to ON (S2022). When it is determined that the normal fluctuation flag 223i is set to ON (S2022: Yes), it is determined whether or not the pseudo symbol variation is being displayed (S2023). When it is determined that the variation of the pseudo symbol is being displayed (S2023: Yes), the interrupt normal pseudo variation pattern is set, and the normal variation flag 223i is set to off (S2024).

Here, the interrupt normal pseudo-variation pattern varies as shown in FIG. 48 (a) below when the pseudo-symbol is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 48 (a). The pseudo symbol being displayed is reduced to the lower part of the third symbol display device 81 and displayed in a variable manner, and the characters "Emergency news shortcut occurs !!" are displayed above the pseudo symbol, and the first ordinary electric accessory is displayed. The player is in a state where the first blade 64s1 or the second blade 64s2 of the second ordinary electric accessory is opened and the game ball enters the first ordinary entry port 640s1 or the second ordinary entry port 640s2. Will be notified to.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo symbol is in the stop display (S2023: No), the normal normal pseudo fluctuation pattern is set, and the normal fluctuation flag 223i is set to off (S2025).

Here, the ordinary pseudo-variation pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 48 (b). When the normal pseudo-variation pattern is set, as shown in FIG. 48 (b), the characters "attack chance" are displayed, and the characters "aim for the right chucker !!" are displayed, so that the player The first blade 64s1 of the first ordinary electric accessory or the second blade 64s2 of the second ordinary electric accessory opens to allow a game ball to enter the first ordinary entry port 640s1 or the second ordinary entry port 640s2. Notify that the state will be reached.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal fluctuation flag 223i is off (S2022: No), it is determined whether or not the pseudo symbol is variablely displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (S2026). Here, the variation display of the pseudo symbol includes the variation display in the interrupt normal pseudo variation pattern and the normal normal pseudo variation pattern. If it is determined that the pseudo symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S2026: Yes), the process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (S2026: No), the value of the pseudo fluctuation selection counter 223a is acquired (S2027). A pseudo-variation pattern of a pseudo-symbol is selected from the pseudo-variation table 222a (see FIG. 44 (b)) based on the acquired value of the pseudo-variation selection counter 223a and the status type (status information) stored in the slave status storage area 223h. (S2028). A display pseudo-variation pattern command is set (generated) based on the selected (set) pseudo-variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 44B, the pseudo-variation table 222a is set so that the selection ratio differs from the variation pattern of the selected pseudo-symbols according to the status type. Specifically, in the status E, the precursor C pseudo-variation pattern is configured to be selected regardless of the value of the pseudo-variation selection counter 223a, and the status D, the status C, the status B, and the status A are selected in this order. The selection ratio is set to be low in the precursor C pseudo-variation pattern. Further, the precursor B fluctuation pattern is set so that the most selected ratio is set at the time of status C, and the precursor A fluctuation pattern is configured so that the most selected ratio is set at the status B. ing.

Further, since each status is set by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 so that the ratio selected by the distribution winning ball number counter 203e differs depending on the value, it depends on the selection frequency of the variation pattern of the selected pseudo symbol. It is configured so that the number of game balls that have won a prize in the current distribution winning device 64 can be predicted.

Therefore, the more skilled the game is, the more it is possible to predict the number of game balls that have won a certain amount of distribution winning device 64 from the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo symbol. Therefore, not only the jackpot of the special symbol but also the fun of predicting can be obtained, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage. Further, the more the game is played, the more the pachinko machine 10 can determine the state, and the player can be made to play the game for a long time.

In the present embodiment, when the hit variation pattern of the normal symbol is received, a predetermined notification mode is divided into the states of the pseudo symbol and displayed on the pseudo symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal symbol is not limited to this. When the hit variation pattern is received, if the pseudo symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the pseudo symbol is stopped in a specific display mode (for example, a chance eye such as 341), so that the player can see the normal symbol. It may be configured to notify the hit of. With this configuration, the player can be more interested in the variable display of the pseudo pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the background selection process 2 (S1650), which is one of the main processes (FIG. 62, S1600) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described in the second embodiment. .. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the background selection process 2 (S1650).

In the background selection process 2 (FIG. 66, S1650), first, the value of the background change counter 223j is acquired (S2121). It is determined whether the acquired background change counter 223j has a value greater than 50, that is, 51 or more (S2122). When it is determined that the value of the background change counter 223j is 51 or more (S2122: Yes), the value of the pseudo-variation selection counter 223a is acquired (S2123). The background pattern (background image type) is selected (determined) from the background selection table 222b based on the acquired pseudo-variation selection counter 223a and the status type (status information) stored in the slave status storage area 223h (S2124). .. A display background command is set (generated) based on the selected background pattern. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the background change counter 223j is 50 or less (S2122: No), this process is terminated.

In this way, whether or not to change the background image is determined by lottery, so that the background image can be changed at random occasions. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting into the game.

Further, since the background pattern is set so that the selection ratio differs depending on the status type, the player can enter the ball into the current distribution winning device 64 depending on the frequency of the displayed background pattern. You can predict the number.

In addition, status E, which is easy to be selected with a large value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e, is selected even when the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e is relatively small (for example, 10 etc.). In fact, even if the number of game balls that have won the distribution winning device 64 is small, it is expected that the number of balls that will be won in the first starting port 71 will be reached soon. You can play a game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game before the number of game balls that will win the first starting port 71 enters the distribution winning device 64.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls that have entered the ball entry port 640 is not output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the external terminal that can be connected to the device on the game store side is pachinko. It may be provided in the machine 10 so that the pachinko machine 10 outputs the number of game balls that have entered the ball entry port 640 to the outside. With this configuration, the player can be notified of the number of game balls that have won the current distribution winning device 64 at the discretion of the game store. Therefore, if the game store side informs the information that is advantageous to the player, it is possible to attract more players to the store.

A first flow path switching means for alternately distributing a game ball to a first flow path and a second flow path, and a third flow path for a game ball distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means. A second flow path switching means that alternately distributes the ball to the fourth flow path, a ball entry port that allows a game ball flowing down the fourth flow path distributed to the second flow path switching means to enter, and a ball entry port thereof. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entrance, the hit / fail judgment means for executing the hit / miss judgment of the game and the hit / miss judgment result by the hit / miss judgment means are hit, and the player is given a privilege game. A gaming machine A1 characterized by having a privileged gaming execution means to be granted.

According to the gaming machine A1, the following effects are obtained. That is, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path by the first flow path switching means. The game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching member are alternately distributed to the third flow path and the fourth flow path by the second flow path switching means.

A hit / fail determination is executed by the hit / miss determination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entry port where the game ball flowing down the fourth flow path distributed to the second flow path switching means can enter. Based on the result of the winning / failing determination by the winning / failing determination means, the privileged game is given to the player by the privileged game executing means. Therefore, the game balls distributed by the first flow path switching means are entered into the ball entrances at predetermined numbers, and the player can determine which number of game balls are distributed by the first flow path switching means. You can enjoy it and prevent you from getting bored of the game early.

The gaming machine A1 has a game ball distribution means having the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means, and the game ball distribution means distributes a game ball. A ball entry port, a guide path for guiding the game ball entered from the ball entry port to the first flow path switching means, and a game ball distributed to the first flow path by the first flow path switching means are discharged. The gaming machine A2 is characterized by having a first discharge port for discharging a game ball distributed to the third flow path by the second flow path switching means, and a second discharge port for discharging the game ball distributed to the third flow path.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the game ball distribution means having the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means, the game ball entered from the distribution entry ball into which the game ball can enter is the first flow path. It is guided to the switching means by a guide path. The game balls distributed to the first flow path switching means by the first flow path switching means are discharged by the first discharge port. Further, the game balls distributed to the third flow path by the second flow path switching means are discharged by the second discharge port. As a result, the player can easily distribute the game ball to the first flow path or the third flow path in which the game ball is not entered into the ball entry port due to the game ball being discharged from the first discharge port or the second discharge port. Can be recognized. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the progress of the game without concentrating on whether or not the ball has entered the ball entrance.

In the gaming machines A1 or A2, the hit / fail determination is executed by the hit / fail determination means based on the entry of a game ball different from the entry port, and in the normal gaming state, the special entry port is reached. In a special game state different from the normal game state, the ball entry of the game ball is set to be difficult, and the ball entry of the game ball into the special entry port is set more easily than in the normal game state. Means and a privilege game type determining means for determining a normal privilege game that sets the game state after the privilege game to the normal game state and a special privilege game that sets the game state after the privilege game to the special game state. The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the special entry port in the special gaming state is configured so that a game ball can enter the ball more easily than the entry port.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 or A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game ball enters the special entry port different from the entry opening, the hit / fail determination means is executed. In the normal game state, it is set that it is difficult for the game ball to enter the special entrance, and in the special game state different from the normal game state, the game ball enters the special entrance is more difficult than in the normal game state. It is easily set by the ball entry control means. The normal privilege game that sets the game state after the privilege game to the normal game state and the special privilege game that sets the game state after the privilege game to the special game state are determined by the privilege game type determining means. In the special game state, the special entrance is configured so that the game ball can enter more easily than the entrance. Therefore, in the normal game state, the game balls enter the entry slot every predetermined number and the hit / fail judgment is executed, but in the special game state, the game balls enter the special entry slot more easily. Since it is possible to play a ball, it is possible to provide an efficient game. Therefore, the player can play a game different from the normal game state and the special game state, and can prevent the player from getting bored with the game.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means include a first accommodating portion capable of accepting a game ball and the first accommodating portion capable of accepting a game ball. A different second accommodating portion, the first accommodating portion, and the second accommodating portion are provided, and the second accommodating portion rotates by receiving a game ball in the second accommodating portion to rotate the second accommodating portion or the fourth accommodating portion. The game ball is distributed to the first accommodating portion and rotated to a first position where the game ball can be received in the first accommodating portion, and the gaming ball is rotated by receiving the game ball in the first accommodating portion at the first accommodating portion. A rotating means that distributes the game ball to the first flow path or the third flow path and rotates the game ball to a second position that can accept the game ball in the second accommodating portion, and the game at the first position or the second position. Rotation regulating means that regulates the rotation of the rotating means from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position before receiving the ball into the first accommodating portion or the second accommodating portion. A4 gaming machine characterized by having and.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are provided with a first accommodating portion and a second accommodating portion capable of accepting the game ball, and the second accommodating portion receives the game ball to rotate the game ball. It moves and distributes the received game ball to the second flow path or the fourth flow path, and at the first position where the game ball can be received in the first accommodating portion and the first accommodating portion thereof. Rotating means by receiving the game ball, distributing the received game ball to the first flow path or the third flow path, and rotating the game ball to a second position where the game ball can be received in the second accommodating portion. Is rotated by. Then, in the first position or the second position, the rotating means rotates from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position before receiving the game ball into the first accommodating portion or the second accommodating portion. It is regulated by the rotation regulation means. As a result, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means alternately rotate to the first position and the second position, so that the game balls can be reliably distributed alternately. Further, the rotation from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position is restricted when the game ball is not in the first accommodating portion or the second accommodating portion, so that it is continuous. It is possible to prevent the game ball from being accepted in the same storage unit. Therefore, the game balls can be distributed alternately more reliably.

An initial control means that executes either an initialization control process that initializes the gaming machine when the power is turned on to the gaming machine or an initial control process that sets the state immediately before the power is turned off, and the initialization. In a gaming machine having a normal control means for executing a normal control process for executing a normal game after the control process or the initial control process is executed, the game ball is transferred to the first flow path and the second flow. The first flow path switching means that alternately distributes to the road and the game ball that is distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are alternately distributed to the third flow path and the fourth flow path. The second flow path switching means, the entry port where the game ball flowing down the fourth flow path distributed to the second flow path switching means can enter, and the game ball entering the entry port. Based on the above, the winning / failing determination means for executing the winning / failing determination of the game, the privileged game executing means for granting the privileged game to the player based on the winning / failing determination result by the winning / failing determination means, and the initialization. In the control process, at least one of the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means is provided with an initial switching setting means for setting a state in which the game ball can be distributed to a predetermined flow path. The gaming machine B1 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine B1, the following effects are obtained. That is, either the initialization control process that initializes the gaming machine when the power is turned on to the gaming machine or the initial control process that sets the state immediately before the power is turned off is executed by the initial control means. After the initialization control process and the initial control process are executed, the normal control process for executing the normal game is executed by the normal control means. The game ball is alternately distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path by the first flow path switching means. The game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are alternately distributed to the third flow path and the fourth flow path by the second flow path switching means. A hit / fail determination is executed by the hit / miss determination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entry port where the game ball flowing down the fourth flow path distributed to the second flow path switching means can enter. Based on the result of the winning / failing determination by the winning / failing determination means, the privileged game is given to the player by the privileged game executing means. By the initialization control process, at least one of the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means is set by the initial switching setting means so that the game ball can be distributed to the predetermined flow path. Therefore, the game balls distributed by the first flow path switching means are entered into the ball entrances at predetermined numbers, and the player can determine which number of game balls are distributed by the first flow path switching means. You can enjoy it and prevent you from getting bored of the game early. Further, when the game machine is initialized, the flow path to which the game balls are distributed is set to be a predetermined flow path, so that from the initial state until the game balls enter the ball entrance. The number of game balls required for the game can be set to a certain level or more. Therefore, the difference between the advantages and disadvantages of each gaming machine can be reduced by setting the initial state.

In the gaming machine B1, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are different from the first accommodating portion that can accept the game ball and the first accommodating portion that can accept the game ball. The first accommodating portion and the second accommodating portion are provided, and the pachinko ball is rotated by receiving the game ball in the second accommodating portion to distribute the game ball to the second flow path or the fourth flow path. Then, it rotates to a first position where the game ball can be received in the first accommodating portion, and rotates by receiving the game ball into the first accommodating portion at the first position, and rotates in the first flow path or the first accommodating portion. A rotating means for distributing the game ball to the three flow paths and rotating the game ball to a second position where the game ball can be received in the second accommodating portion, and at the first position or the second position, the game ball is moved to the first position. It has a rotation regulating means for restricting the rotation of the rotating means from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position before being received in the accommodating portion or the second accommodating portion. A gaming machine B2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are provided with a first accommodating portion and a second accommodating portion capable of accepting the game ball, and the second accommodating portion receives the game ball to rotate the game ball. It moves and distributes the received game ball to the second flow path or the fourth flow path, and at the first position where the game ball can be received in the first accommodating portion and the first position thereof, it becomes the first accommodating portion. It rotates by accepting the game ball, distributes the accepted game ball to the first flow path or the third flow path, and uses a rotating means to move the received game ball to a second position where the game ball can be received in the second accommodating portion. It is rotated. Then, in the first position or the second position, the rotating means rotates from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position before receiving the game ball into the first accommodating portion or the second accommodating portion. It is regulated by the rotation regulation means. As a result, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means alternately rotate to the first position and the second position, so that the game balls can be reliably distributed alternately. Further, the rotation from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position is restricted when the game ball is not in the first accommodating portion or the second accommodating portion, so that it is continuous. It is possible to prevent the game ball from being accepted in the same storage unit. Therefore, the game balls can be distributed alternately more reliably.

In the gaming machine B2, the initial switching setting means sets the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means at the first position.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are set to the first positions by the initial switching setting means. It is possible to set the maximum number of game balls required to be distributed to the flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means and to enter the ball entry port. Therefore, by initializing the gaming machines, the settings between the gaming machines can be made equal, the balls can be entered into the ball entrance early, and the jackpot is given early, causing damage to the gaming store. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

In the gaming machine B2, an initial determination of whether to set the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means set by the initial switching setting means at the first position or the second position, respectively. The former initial switching setting means has a switching position determining means, and sets the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means, respectively, based on the settings determined by the initial switching position determining means. A gaming machine B4 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the initial switching position determining means determines which of the first position and the second position the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means set by the initial switching setting means are set. The first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are set by the initial switching setting means, respectively, based on the settings determined by the initial switching position determining means. As a result, when the gaming machines are initialized, the settings for the first flow path switching means or the second flow path switching means are randomly set each time in each gaming machine, so that each gaming machine has a first setting. The setting with the 1 flow path switching means or the 2nd flow path switching means can be easily set differently. Therefore, the player can select the gaming machine with the pleasure of selecting the gaming machine that is more advantageous to the player from among the plurality of gaming machines, even if the gaming machine is initialized. Therefore, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of playing the game.

A first flow path switching means for alternately distributing a game ball to a first flow path and a second flow path, and a third flow path for a game ball distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means. A second flow path switching means that alternately distributes the ball to the fourth flow path, a ball entry port that allows a game ball flowing down the fourth flow path distributed to the second flow path switching means to enter, and a ball entry port thereof. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entrance, the hit / fail judgment means for executing the hit / miss judgment of the game and the hit / miss judgment result by the hit / miss judgment means are hit, and the player is given a privilege game. The game ball is set to which flow path the game ball is distributed to at least one of the privileged game executing means to be given and the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means after the privilege game is completed. A gaming machine C1 having a flow path determining means for determining whether or not to play.

According to the gaming machine C1, the gaming balls are alternately distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path by the first flow path switching means. The game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are alternately distributed to the third flow path and the fourth flow path by the second flow path switching means. A hit / fail determination is executed by the hit / miss determination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entry port where the game ball flowing down the fourth flow path distributed to the second flow path switching means can enter. Based on the result of the winning / failing determination by the winning / failing determination means, the privileged game is given to the player by the privileged game executing means. Therefore, the game balls distributed by the first flow path switching means are entered into the ball entrances at predetermined numbers, and the player can determine which number of game balls are distributed by the first flow path switching means. You can enjoy it and prevent you from getting bored of the game early. Further, after the end of the privilege game, the flow path is determined as to which flow path the game ball is set to be distributed to at least one of the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means. Determined by means. As a result, the number of game balls distributed to the first flow path switching means will change randomly by the time the game balls enter the entrance after the privilege game, and the player will be asked what kind of setting will be made. You can expect it. Therefore, more enjoyment can be provided to the player.

In the gaming machine C1, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are different from the first accommodating portion that can accept the game ball and the first accommodating portion that can accept the game ball. A unit, the first accommodating portion, and the second accommodating portion are provided, and the gaming ball is rotated by receiving the gaming ball in the second accommodating portion, and the gaming ball is placed in the second or fourth flow path. It is distributed and rotated to a first position where the game ball can be received in the first accommodating portion, and is rotated by receiving the game ball in the first accommodating portion at the first position, and is rotated by the first flow path or the first accommodating portion. A rotating means for distributing the game ball to the third flow path and rotating the game ball to a second position where the game ball can be received in the second accommodating portion, and the game ball at the first position or the second position. (1) A rotation regulating means for restricting the rotation of the rotating means from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position before being received in the accommodating portion or the second accommodating portion. A gaming machine C2 characterized by being a machine.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are provided with a first accommodating portion and a second accommodating portion capable of accepting the game ball, and the second accommodating portion receives the game ball to rotate the game ball. It moves and distributes the received game ball to the second flow path or the fourth flow path, and at the first position where the game ball can be received in the first accommodating portion and the first accommodating portion thereof. Rotating means by receiving the game ball, distributing the received game ball to the first flow path or the third flow path, and rotating the game ball to a second position where the game ball can be received in the second accommodating portion. Is rotated by. Then, in the first position or the second position, the rotating means rotates from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position before receiving the game ball into the first accommodating portion or the second accommodating portion. It is regulated by the rotation regulation means. As a result, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means alternately rotate to the first position and the second position, so that the game balls can be reliably distributed alternately. Further, the rotation from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position is restricted when the game ball is not in the first accommodating portion or the second accommodating portion, so that it is continuous. It is possible to prevent the game ball from being accepted in the same storage unit. Therefore, the game balls can be distributed alternately more reliably.

In the gaming machine C2, the flow path determining means sets the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means at either the first position or the second position based on a predetermined lottery. The rotating means autonomously rotates the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means at positions determined by the flow path determining means. A gaming machine C3 characterized by having means.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on a predetermined lottery, the flow path determining means determines whether the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are set to the first position or the second position, respectively. In the rotating means, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are rotated by the rotating means, respectively, at the positions determined by the flow path determining means. Thereby, the setting of the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means after the privilege game can be easily executed. Therefore, the processing at the end of the privilege game can be reduced, and the time from the end of the privilege game to the execution of the normal game can be shortened.

In any of the game machines C1 to C3, the first flow path switching means and the said Each has a setting table in which the settings with the second flow path switching means are stored, and the flow path determining means is necessary for entering the game ball into the ball entry port based on the predetermined lottery. The number of game balls to be distributed to the first flow path switching means is determined, and the setting of the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means is set from the setting table based on the number of game balls. A gaming machine C4 characterized in that each is determined.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the setting of the first flow path switching means and the first flow path switching means corresponding to the number of game balls distributed to the first flow path switching means required for entering the game ball into the ball entry port. Are stored in the setting table respectively. Then, based on a predetermined lottery, the number of game balls to be distributed to the first flow path switching means required for entering the game ball into the ball entrance is determined, and the first flow path switching means and the setting table are used. The setting with the second flow path switching means is determined by the flow path determining means. Thereby, the first flow path switching member and the second flow path switching member can be easily set according to the number of game balls required to enter the game ball into the ball entry port. Therefore, the control load after executing the privilege game can be reduced.

The entrance of the ball, which is determined to satisfy the hit / fail judgment condition based on the entry of the game ball, the hit / miss judgment means for executing the hit / fail judgment of the game based on the establishment of the hit / miss judgment condition, and the hit / miss judgment means. When the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the hit / fail judgment result or the game information related to the game and the identification information indicating that the hit / fail judgment result of the hit / fail judgment means is a hit are displayed on the display means, the game is played. A gaming machine having a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game for giving a privilege to a person has a distribution winning means for guiding a game ball to the entrance, and the distribution winning means is the distribution winning means. The distribution ball opening that allows the game ball to enter the prize-winning means and the game ball that has entered the distribution ball opening are alternately distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path. The first flow path switching means and the game ball distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are alternately distributed to the third flow path and the fourth flow path that guides the game ball to the entry port. The display is based on the count value of the distribution prize in-counting means, which has a second flow path switching means and counts the number of game balls in the distribution winning means, and the distribution winning in-counting means. A gaming machine D1 having a gaming information determining means for determining the gaming information to be displayed on the means.

According to the gaming machine D1, it is determined that the winning / failing determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the gaming ball enters the entrance. Based on the establishment of the winning / failing determination condition, the winning / failing determination of the game is determined by the winning / failing determination means. The identification information or the game information related to the game is displayed by the display means. When the display means displays the identification information indicating that the hit / fail determination result is a hit, the privilege game that gives the player a privilege is executed by the privilege game execution means. In the distribution winning means that guides the game ball to the ball entry port, the game ball that has entered the distribution winning ball opening that allows the game ball to enter the distribution winning means is the first flow path and the second flow path. Are alternately sorted by the first flow path switching means. The game ball distributed to the second flow path by the second flow path switching means by the first flow path switching means alternates between the third flow path and the fourth flow path guided to the entry port to the second flow path. It is sorted by the road switching means. The number of game balls in the distribution winning means is counted by the distribution winning means. Based on the count value of the distribution winning in-counting means, the game information to be displayed on the display means is determined by the game information determining means. As a result, the player can enjoy by expecting whether or not the game ball that has entered the distribution winning means will enter the entrance. In addition, every time a predetermined number of game balls are entered into the distribution winning means, the game balls are inserted into the entrance, so how long does the player have to enter the entrance? It is possible to predict whether or not the ball needs to be entered into the distribution winning means, and it is possible to provide more enjoyment of the game. In addition, since the game information to be displayed on the display means is determined by the number of game balls entered in the distribution winning means, the game information is displayed at a random opportunity, and the player can play the game. It can prevent you from getting bored.

In the game machine D1, the number of balls entered to count the number of game balls entered into the distribution entry port and the game information determining means have a predetermined count value of the counting means in the distribution winning prize. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the game information of 1 is determined from among a plurality of different types of the gaming information based on the count value of the number of incoming balls counting means.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number of game balls that have entered the distribution slot is counted by the ball entry counting means. Taking the opportunity that the count value of the distribution winning in-counting means is a predetermined count value, one game information from a plurality of different types of game information is determined based on the count value of the distribution winning in-counting means. Determined by means. As a result, the game information is determined based on the count value of the distribution winning means, so that the player is notified of the information regarding the number of game balls that have entered the distribution winning means based on the determined game information. Can be done. Therefore, the player determines the number of game balls to be entered in the distribution winning means required for entering the ball entrance from the information on the number of game balls winning in the distribution winning means from the game information. be able to.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the gaming machine D3 is characterized in that the gaming information is information related to background information on which the identification information is displayed.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the gaming information is composed of information related to the background information of the display means on which the identification information is displayed, so that the player can display the identification information. Even when you are playing, you can check the game information and get information about the game.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means include a first accommodating portion capable of accepting a game ball and the first accommodating portion capable of accepting a game ball. A different second accommodating portion, the first accommodating portion, and the second accommodating portion are provided, and the second accommodating portion rotates by receiving a game ball in the second accommodating portion to rotate the second accommodating portion or the fourth accommodating portion. The game ball is distributed to the first accommodating portion, rotated to a first position where the gaming ball can be received in the first accommodating portion, and rotated by receiving the gaming ball in the first accommodating portion at the first position. A rotating means that distributes a game ball to one flow path or a third flow path and rotates the game ball to a second position that can accept the game ball in the second accommodating portion, and a game in the first position or the second position. It regulates the rotation of the rotating means from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position before accepting the ball into the first accommodating portion or the second accommodating portion. A gaming machine D4 characterized by having a rotation restricting means.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are provided with a first accommodating portion and a second accommodating portion capable of accepting the game ball, and the second accommodating portion receives the game ball to rotate the game ball. It moves and distributes the received game ball to the second flow path or the fourth flow path, and at the first position where the game ball can be received in the first accommodating portion and the first position thereof, it becomes the first accommodating portion. Rotating means by receiving the game ball, distributing the received game ball to the first flow path or the third flow path, and rotating the game ball to a second position where the game ball can be received in the second accommodating portion. Rotates by. Then, in the first position or the second position, the rotating means rotates from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position before receiving the game ball into the first accommodating portion or the second accommodating portion. It is regulated by the rotation regulation means. As a result, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means alternately rotate to the first position and the second position, so that the game balls can be reliably distributed alternately. Further, the rotation from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position is restricted when the game ball is not in the first accommodating portion or the second accommodating portion, so that it is continuous. It is possible to prevent the game ball from being accepted in the same storage unit. Therefore, the game balls can be distributed alternately more reliably.

The entrance of the ball, which is determined to satisfy the hit / fail judgment condition based on the entry of the game ball, the hit / miss judgment means for executing the hit / fail judgment of the game based on the establishment of the hit / miss judgment condition, and the hit / miss judgment means. When the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the hit / fail judgment result or the game information related to the game and the identification information indicating that the hit / fail judgment result of the hit / fail judgment means is a hit are displayed on the display means, the game is played. A gaming machine having a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game for giving a privilege to a person has a distribution winning means for guiding a game ball to the entrance, and the distribution winning means is the distribution winning means. The distribution ball opening that allows the game ball to enter the prize-winning means and the game ball that has entered the distribution ball opening are alternately distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path. The first flow path switching means and the game ball distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are alternately distributed to the third flow path and the fourth flow path that guides the game ball to the entry port. It has a second flow path switching means, and is one of the game information and a ball entry counting means for updating the count value based on the game ball entering the distribution slot. When the condition for starting the dynamic display of the pseudo-identification information is satisfied, one of the plurality of pseudo-identification information dynamic display modes is pseudo-dynamic display mode based on the count value of the ball entry counting means. The gaming machine E1 is characterized by having a pseudo-dynamic display mode determining means for determining the above.

According to the gaming machine E1, it is determined that the winning / failing determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the gaming ball enters the entrance. Based on the establishment of the winning / failing determination condition, the winning / failing determination of the game is determined by the winning / failing determination means. The identification information or the game information related to the game is displayed by the display means. When the display means displays the identification information indicating that the hit / fail determination result is a hit, the privilege game that gives the player a privilege is executed by the privilege game execution means. In the distribution winning means for guiding the game ball to the ball entrance, the first method in which the game ball entering the distribution winning means where the game ball can enter the distribution winning means is guided to the outside of the distribution winning means. The flow path and the second flow path are alternately distributed by the first flow path switching means. The game ball distributed to the second flow path by the second flow path switching means by the first flow path switching means is guided to the outside of the distribution winning means, and is guided to the third flow path and the ball entry port. It is alternately distributed to and from the flow path by the second flow path switching means. The count value is updated by the number of incoming balls counting means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the distribution entrance. One of a plurality of dynamic display modes of the pseudo-identification information based on the count value of the number of incoming balls counting means, triggered by the establishment of the condition for starting the dynamic display of the pseudo-identification information which is one of the game information. The pseudo-dynamic display mode is determined by the pseudo-dynamic display mode determining means. As a result, the player can enjoy by expecting whether or not the game ball that has entered the distribution winning means will enter the entrance. Therefore, every time a predetermined number of game balls are entered into the distribution winning means, the game balls are entered into the entrance, so that the player shakes how long after entering the entrance. It is possible to predict whether or not the ball needs to be entered into the prize-winning means, and it is possible to provide more enjoyment of the game. Further, since the dynamic display mode of the pseudo identification information, which is one of the game information, is determined and dynamically displayed based on the number of game balls entered in the distribution winning means, the pseudo dynamic display mode is used. Therefore, it is possible to make the player determine the number of game balls that have entered the distribution winning means. Therefore, even when the game ball does not enter the ball entrance, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and getting bored with the game.

In the gaming machine E1, the pseudo-dynamic display mode determining means sets the pseudo-dynamic display mode as a condition for starting the dynamic display of the pseudo-identification information that the game ball has entered the distribution ball opening. The gaming machine E2, which is characterized by being determined.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the pseudo-dynamic display mode is determined by the pseudo-dynamic display mode determining means as a condition for starting the dynamic display in the pseudo-identification information that the game ball has entered the distribution slot. Since the dynamic display is started in the pseudo-dynamic display mode at the timing when the game ball enters the distribution winning means, the timing of the dynamic display in the pseudo-dynamic display mode can be easily recognized. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize at what timing the pseudo-dynamic display mode is based on the ball entering the distribution winning means. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately recognize the number of game balls that have entered the distribution winning means from the pseudo-dynamic display mode.

In the game machine E1 or E2, when the game ball enters the ball entrance and the identification information is displayed in a state where the pseudo-dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed on the display means. E3 is a gaming machine E3 having a display switching means for switching the pseudo-dynamic display mode to the display of the identification information.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E1 or E2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game ball enters the ball entrance and the identification information is displayed while the pseudo-dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed on the display means, the pseudo-dynamic display mode is identified. The information display can be switched by the display switching means. Therefore, even when the pseudo-dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed, the display can be switched to the identification information display, so that it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the display of the identification information.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the dynamic identification display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information to one of the plurality of dynamic identification display modes, and the operation. When the pseudo-dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed, the target identification display mode determining means determines the dynamic identification display mode corresponding to the dynamically displayed pseudo-dynamic display mode, while determining the dynamic identification display mode. Claim 1 is characterized in that when the pseudo-dynamic display mode is a non-dynamic display, a dedicated dynamic identification display mode is determined when the pseudo-dynamic display mode is a non-dynamic display. The gaming machine E4 according to any one of 3 to 3.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, one of the plurality of dynamic identification display modes of the identification information is determined by the dynamic identification display mode determining means. When the pseudo-dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed, the dynamic identification display mode corresponding to the dynamically displayed pseudo-dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic identification display mode determining means. On the other hand, when the pseudo-dynamic display mode is a non-dynamic display, a dedicated dynamic identification display mode when the pseudo-dynamic display mode is a non-dynamic display is determined by the dynamic identification display mode determining means. NS. As a result, the dynamic identification display mode is determined according to the pseudo-dynamic display mode that is dynamically displayed, so that the player feels unnatural to switch from the pseudo-dynamic display mode to the dynamic identification display mode. It is possible to prevent it from being caused. Therefore, the player can identify the content of the pseudo-dynamic display mode as a dynamic display connected to the dynamic identification display mode, so that the player's attention can be drawn to the pseudo-dynamic display mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

A ball entrance that determines that the hit / fail judgment condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering, a hit / fail judgment means that executes the hit / fail judgment of the game based on the establishment of the hit / miss judgment condition, and the hit / fail judgment means. In a game machine having a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game for giving a privilege to a player based on a hit / fail determination result, a distribution winning means for guiding a game ball to the entrance. The distribution winning means has a distribution entry port in which a game ball can be inserted into the distribution winning means, and a game ball inserted into the distribution entry port into the first flow path. A first flow path switching means having a first distribution movable means that moves alternately between a first position for distribution and a second position for distribution to a second flow path, and the second flow path switching means by the first flow path switching means. A second distribution movable means that can be moved alternately between a third position for distributing the game ball distributed to the road to the third flow path and a fourth position for distributing the game ball to the fourth flow path for guiding to the entry port. A position determining means having a second flow path switching means for at least determining the position of the second distribution movable means, and a position determining means for determining when a game ball enters the ball entrance. A position monitoring means for determining whether the position is normal based on the position of the second distribution movable means, and an abnormality processing execution for executing an abnormality process when the position monitoring means determines that the position is abnormal. A gaming machine F1 characterized by having means and means.

According to the gaming machine F1, it is determined that the winning / failing determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the gaming ball enters the entrance. Based on the establishment of the winning / failing determination condition, the winning / failing determination of the game is determined by the winning / failing determination means. Based on the result of the winning / failing determination by the winning / failing determination means, the privileged game that grants the privilege to the player is executed by the privileged game executing means. In the distribution winning means that guides the game ball to the entrance, the first position in which the game ball that has entered the distribution entrance where the game ball can enter the distribution winning means is distributed to the first flow path. It is distributed by the first flow path switching means having the first distribution movable means which is movable alternately with the second position which is distributed to the second flow path. The game ball distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means is divided into a third position where it is distributed to the third flow path and a fourth position where the game ball is distributed to the fourth flow path guided to the entry port. Sorting is performed by a second flow path switching means having a second sorting movable means that moves alternately. The position of the second distribution movable means is determined by the position determining means. When the game ball enters the ball entrance, the position monitoring means determines whether the position is normal or not based on the position of the second position movable means determined by the position determining means. Then, when the position monitoring means determines that it is abnormal, the abnormal processing is executed by the abnormal processing executing means. As a result, the player can enjoy by expecting whether or not the game ball that has entered the distribution winning means will enter the entrance. Therefore, every time a predetermined number of game balls are entered into the distribution winning means, the game balls are entered into the entrance, so that the player shakes how long after entering the entrance. It is possible to predict whether or not the ball needs to be entered into the prize-winning means, and it is possible to provide more enjoyment of the game. Further, when a game ball enters the ball entry port, it is determined whether or not the ball is abnormally entered based on the position of the second distribution movable means, so that illegal entry can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the damage caused by illegally entering the ball into the ball entrance.

In the game machine F1, when a game ball enters the ball entrance, if the game ball enters the distribution slot after the ball entered, after that. The pachinko ball has a subsequent position determining means for determining that the entered game ball has moved the first distribution movable means and the second distribution movable means, and the position monitoring means has the game ball at the entrance. The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that, when a ball is entered, it is determined whether or not the position is normal based on the determination result of the subsequent position determining means.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a game ball enters the ball entrance, if the game ball enters the distribution slot after the ball entered, the game ball entered after that. Is determined by the subsequent position determination means that the first distribution movable means and the second distribution movable means have been moved. When a game ball enters the ball entrance, the position determination means determines whether the position is normal or not based on the determination result of the subsequent position determination means. Therefore, when a game ball enters the ball entry port, it is possible to more accurately determine whether or not the ball has entered the ball entry port by a normal game. Therefore, the damage caused by fraud can be reduced.

The entrance of the ball, which is determined to satisfy the hit / fail judgment condition based on the entry of the game ball, the hit / fail judgment means for executing the hit / fail judgment of the game based on the establishment of the hit / miss judgment condition, and the hit / miss judgment means. In a game machine having a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game for giving a privilege to a player based on a hit / fail determination result, a distribution winning means for guiding a game ball to the entrance. The distribution winning means has a distribution entry port in which a game ball can enter the distribution winning means, and a game ball entering the distribution entry port as a first flow path. A first flow path switching means that alternately distributes to the second flow path and a game ball that is distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are placed in the third flow path and the entry port. The number of balls entering the ball, which has a second flow path switching means for alternately distributing the ball to the fourth flow path for guiding the ball, and updates the count value based on the game ball entering the distribution ball opening. When the counting means and the count value are values indicating that the game ball for which the game ball is distributed to the fourth flow path by the second flow path switching means has entered, the count value is used. Whether the measuring means for measuring the time after the game ball has passed through the distribution slot and the measurement time of the measuring means when the game ball enters the ball slot are within the effective time. The gaming machine G1 is characterized by having an abnormal ball entry monitoring means for executing an abnormal process for an abnormal ball entry when the valid period is out of the valid period.

According to the gaming machine G1, it is determined that the winning / failing determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the gaming ball enters the entrance. Based on the establishment of the winning / failing determination condition, the winning / failing determination of the game is determined by the winning / failing determination means. Based on the result of the winning / failing determination by the winning / failing determination means, the privileged game that grants the privilege to the player is executed by the privileged game executing means. In the distribution winning means that guides the game ball to the ball entry port, the game ball that has entered the distribution winning ball opening that allows the game ball to enter the distribution winning means is the first flow path and the second flow path. Are alternately sorted by the first flow path switching means. The game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are alternately distributed to the third flow path and the fourth flow path guided to the entry port by the second flow path switching means. The count value is updated by the number of incoming balls counting means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the distribution entrance. When the count value is a value indicating that the game ball to be distributed to the fourth flow path by the second flow path switching means has entered, the game ball to be the count value is distributed. The time after passing through the ball mouth is measured by the measuring means. When a game ball enters the ball entry port, it is determined whether the measurement time of the measuring means is within the valid time, and if it is out of the valid period, the abnormal processing for the abnormal ball entry is abnormal ball entry monitoring. Performed by means. As a result, the player can enjoy by expecting whether or not the game ball that has entered the distribution winning means will enter the entrance. Therefore, every time a predetermined number of game balls are entered into the distribution winning means, the game balls are entered into the entrance, so that the player shakes how long after entering the entrance. It is possible to predict whether or not the ball needs to be entered into the prize-winning means, and it is possible to provide more enjoyment of the game. In addition, when a game ball enters the ball entrance, if it is determined that the ball has entered outside the effective time, an abnormal process as an abnormal ball entry is executed, so that the ball enters the ball entry port due to fraud. It is possible to reduce the damage caused by.

In the gaming machine G1, the abnormal ball entry monitoring means has an abnormality with respect to the abnormal ball entry when the game ball does not enter the ball entry port even after the measurement time by the measurement means has elapsed. A gaming machine G2 characterized in that it executes processing.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, if the game ball does not enter the ball entry port even after the effective period of the measurement time by the measuring means has elapsed, the abnormal ball entry monitoring means executes the abnormal processing for the abnormal ball entry. As a result, if it is determined that the game ball that will enter the ball entry port has entered the distribution entry ball, and if it is not determined that the ball has entered the ball even after the valid period has passed, Since the abnormal processing is executed, it is possible to recognize that a game ball has been inserted into the distribution winning means due to fraud, or that the ball is jammed in the distribution winning means due to a defect. Therefore, it is possible to detect and improve the damage caused by fraud and the disadvantage of the player due to the defect at an early stage.

In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the abnormal ball entry monitoring means has a count value of a value indicating that a game ball that distributes the game ball to the fourth flow path by the second flow path switching means has entered. The gaming machine G3 is characterized in that when a game ball enters the ball entry port without being discriminated and the measuring means is not timed, an abnormal process for the abnormal ball entry is executed. ..

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G1 or G2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the count value of the ball entry number counting means is not determined as a value indicating that the game ball has entered the fourth flow path, and the game ball is distributed to the fourth flow path, and the measuring means is not. If a game ball enters the ball entry port while the time is being measured, an abnormal process for the abnormal ball entry is executed by the abnormal ball entry monitoring means. As a result, even if the ball is entered when the conditions for entering the ball are not met, it is treated as an abnormal entry, so that fraud or defects can be detected at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to play the game normally by early detecting a fraudulent detection of a ball entering by radio waves or the like, or a defect due to a ball clogging or the like at an early stage.

The entrance of the ball, which is determined to satisfy the hit / fail judgment condition based on the entry of the game ball, the hit / miss judgment means for executing the hit / fail judgment of the game based on the establishment of the hit / miss judgment condition, and the hit / miss judgment means. In a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game for giving a privilege to a player based on a hit / fail determination result, a distribution winning means for guiding a game ball to the entrance. The distribution winning means has a distribution entry port in which a game ball can enter the distribution winning means, and a game ball entering the distribution entry port as a first flow path. A first flow path switching means that alternately distributes to the second flow path and a game ball that is distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are placed in the third flow path and the entry port. A second flow path switching means for alternately distributing to a fourth flow path for inducing Discharged ball number counting means for counting the number of game balls guided from one flow path or the third flow path, and the count value of the input ball number counting means and the discharged ball number counting means based on the establishment of a predetermined opportunity. Abnormal ball entry monitoring that executes abnormal processing as abnormal ball entry when it is determined that there is a difference of more than a predetermined number of abnormal numbers between the comparison means for comparing the count value of A gaming machine H1 characterized by having means and means.

According to the gaming machine H1, it is determined that the winning / failing determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the gaming ball enters the entrance. Based on the establishment of the winning / failing determination condition, the winning / failing determination of the game is determined by the winning / failing determination means. Based on the result of the winning / failing determination by the winning / failing determination means, the privileged game that grants the privilege to the player is executed by the privileged game executing means. In the distribution winning means that guides the game ball to the ball entry port, the game ball that has entered the distribution winning ball opening that allows the game ball to enter the distribution winning means is the first flow path and the second flow path. Are alternately sorted by the first flow path switching means. The game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are alternately distributed to the third flow path and the fourth flow path guided to the entry port by the second flow path switching means. The number of game balls that have entered the distribution slot is counted by the number of incoming balls counting means. Further, the number of game balls guided from the first flow path or the third flow path is counted by the discharge ball number counting means. Based on the establishment of a predetermined opportunity, the count value of the ball entry number counting means and the count value of the discharge ball number counting means are compared by the comparison means. When it is determined that there is a difference of more than a predetermined number of abnormal balls in the comparison result by the comparison means, the abnormal processing as the abnormal ball entering is executed by the abnormal ball entering monitoring means. As a result, the player can enjoy by expecting whether or not the game ball that has entered the distribution winning means will enter the entrance. Therefore, every time a predetermined number of game balls are entered into the distribution winning means, the game balls are entered into the entrance, so that the player shakes how long after entering the entrance. It is possible to predict whether or not the ball needs to be entered into the prize-winning means, and it is possible to provide more enjoyment of the game. In addition, since the difference between the game ball that has entered the distribution winning means and the game ball that has been discharged is determined based on the establishment of a predetermined opportunity, it is necessary to determine whether or not the ball has been illegally entered into the distribution winning means. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraud such as illegally entering a game ball into the distribution winning means from a ball other than the distribution entrance. Therefore, the damage caused by fraud can be reduced.

The entrance of the ball, which is determined to satisfy the hit / fail judgment condition based on the entry of the game ball, the hit / fail determination means for executing the hit / fail judgment of the game based on the establishment of the hit / miss judgment condition, and the hit / miss determination means. In a game machine having a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game for giving a privilege to a player based on a hit / fail determination result, a distribution winning means for guiding a game ball to the entrance. The distribution winning means has a distribution entry port in which a game ball can enter the distribution winning means, and a game ball entering the distribution entry port as a first flow path. A first flow path switching means that alternately distributes to the second flow path and a game ball that is distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are placed in the third flow path and the entry port. It has a second flow path switching means for alternately distributing the ball to the fourth flow path for guiding the ball, and the number of balls entered is added based on the fact that the ball has entered the distribution inlet, and the first A ball-entry counting means for counting the number of game balls entering the distribution winning means, which is subtracted from the number of balls entered based on the fact that the game balls are guided from the flow path or the third flow path. And, when it is determined that the count value of the counting means during ball entry is equal to or more than a predetermined abnormal number or less than the normal number, the abnormal ball entry monitoring means for executing abnormal processing as an abnormal ball entry is provided. A game machine H2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is determined that the winning / failing determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball enters the entrance. Based on the establishment of the winning / failing determination condition, the winning / failing determination of the game is determined by the winning / failing determination means. Based on the result of the winning / failing determination by the winning / failing determination means, the privileged game that grants the privilege to the player is executed by the privileged game executing means. In the distribution winning means that guides the game ball to the ball entry port, the game ball that has entered the distribution winning ball opening that allows the game ball to enter the distribution winning means is the first flow path and the second flow path. Are alternately sorted by the first flow path switching means. The game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are alternately distributed to the third flow path and the fourth flow path guided to the entry port by the second flow path switching means. The number of balls entered is added based on the number of balls entered into the distribution entrance, and the number of balls is subtracted from the number of balls entered based on the fact that the game ball is guided from the first flow path or the third flow path. The number of game balls that have entered the winning means is counted by the counting means during the entry. When it is determined that the count value of the ball-entering counting means is equal to or more than a predetermined abnormal number or less than the normal number, the abnormal ball-filling monitoring means executes an abnormal process as an abnormal ball-filling. As a result, the player can enjoy by expecting whether or not the game ball that has entered the distribution winning means will enter the entrance. Therefore, every time a predetermined number of game balls are entered into the distribution winning means, the game balls are entered into the entrance, so that the player shakes how long after entering the entrance. It is possible to predict whether or not the ball needs to be entered into the prize-winning means, and it is possible to provide more enjoyment of the game. In addition, the game balls being entered in the distribution winning means are counted, and by determining that the count value is equal to or more than the abnormal number or less than the normal number, it is determined whether or not the balls are illegally entered into the distribution winning means. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraud such as illegally entering a game ball into the distribution winning means from a ball other than the distribution entrance. Therefore, the damage caused by fraud can be reduced.

The entrance of the ball, which is determined to satisfy the hit / fail judgment condition based on the entry of the game ball, the hit / miss judgment means for executing the hit / fail judgment of the game based on the establishment of the hit / miss judgment condition, and the hit / miss judgment means. In a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game for giving a privilege to a player based on a hit / fail determination result, a distribution winning means for guiding a game ball to the entrance. The distribution winning means has a distribution entry port in which a game ball can be inserted into the distribution winning means, and a game ball inserted into the distribution entry port into the first flow path. The second flow path switching means having a first distribution movable means that moves alternately between the first position for distribution and the second position for distribution to the second flow path, and the second flow path switching means thereof. A second flow path having a second flow path movable means that alternately moves between a third position for distributing the game ball distributed to the flow path to the third flow path and a fourth position for distributing the game ball to the fourth flow path. A position discriminating means that has a switching means and discriminates the position information between the first sorting movable means and the second sorting movable means, and a game ball enters the sorting winning means. The first distribution movable means in a state in which it is determined by the distribution / input ball determination means for determining whether or not the game ball has entered the distribution winning means. The abnormal operation determining means for determining based on the position information determined by the position determining means and the abnormal operation determining means for determining that the position of at least one of the second distribution movable means is changed is regarded as an abnormal operation. The gaming machine I1 is characterized by having an abnormal processing executing means for executing an abnormal processing when it is determined to operate.

According to the gaming machine I1, it is determined that the winning / failing determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the gaming ball enters the entrance. Based on the establishment of the winning / failing determination condition, the winning / failing determination of the game is determined by the winning / failing determination means. Based on the result of the winning / failing determination by the winning / failing determination means, the privileged game that grants the privilege to the player is executed by the privileged game executing means. In the distribution winning means for guiding the game ball to the entrance, the game ball that has entered the distribution entrance where the game ball can enter the distribution winning means is distributed to the first flow path. Distribution is performed by moving the first distribution movable means of the first flow path switching means alternately between the position and the second position for distribution to the second flow path. The game ball distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means is divided into a third position where it is distributed to the third flow path and a fourth position where the game ball is distributed to the fourth flow path guided to the entry port. Sorting is performed by alternately moving the second distribution movable means of the second flow path switching means. Position information indicating the positions of the first distribution movable means and the second distribution movable means is determined by the position determination means, respectively. The first distribution is performed while it is determined that no game ball has entered the distribution winning means by the distribution winning ball determining means for determining whether or not the game ball has entered the distribution winning means. The change in the position of at least one of the movable means and the second distribution movable means is regarded as an abnormal operation, and the abnormality determination means determines based on the position information determined by the position determining means. When the abnormality determination means determines that the operation is abnormal, the abnormality processing execution means executes the abnormality processing. As a result, the player can enjoy by expecting whether or not the game ball that has entered the distribution winning means will enter the entrance. Therefore, every time a predetermined number of game balls are entered into the distribution winning means, the game balls are entered into the entrance, so that the player shakes how long after entering the entrance. It is possible to predict whether or not the ball needs to be entered into the prize-winning means, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. In addition, when the position of the first distribution movable means and the second distribution movable means is changed in a state where the game ball is not entered in the distribution winning means, an abnormal process is performed as an abnormal operation. Since it is executed, it is possible to illegally operate the distribution winning means to suppress the illegally inserting the game ball into the entrance. Therefore, the damage caused by fraud can be reduced.

In the gaming machine I1, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are different from the first storage unit that can accept the game ball and the first storage unit that can accept the game ball. The first accommodating portion and the second accommodating portion are provided, and the game ball is rotated by receiving the game ball in the second accommodating portion to distribute the game ball to the second flow path or the fourth flow path. Then, the ball is rotated to the first position or the third position where the game ball can be received in the first accommodating portion, and the game ball is received in the first accommodating portion at the first position or the third position. A rotating means that moves to distribute a game ball to the first flow path or the third flow path and rotates the game ball to the second position or the fourth position that can accept the game ball in the second accommodating portion, and the above-mentioned In the first position or the second position, the rotation from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position before accepting the game ball into the first or second accommodating portion. The first rotation regulating means for restricting the rotation of the moving means and the third position at the third position or the fourth position before receiving the game ball into the first accommodating portion or the second accommodating portion. A gaming machine characterized by having a second rotation regulating means for restricting the rotation of the rotating means from the fourth position or the fourth position to the third position. I2.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are provided with a first accommodating portion and a second accommodating portion capable of accepting the game ball, and the second accommodating portion receives the game ball to rotate the game ball. The game ball is moved and distributed to the second flow path or the fourth flow path, and the first position or the third position where the game ball can be received in the first accommodating portion and the first position or the third position thereof. It is possible to rotate by accepting the game ball in the first accommodating portion at the position, distribute the received game ball to the first flow path or the third flow path, and accept the game ball in the second accommodating portion. It is rotated to the second position or the fourth position by the rotating means. Then, in the first position or the second position, the rotating means rotates from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position before receiving the game ball into the first accommodating portion or the second accommodating portion. Is regulated by the first rotation regulating means. Further, in the third position or the fourth position, the rotating means rotates from the third position to the fourth position or from the fourth position to the third position before receiving the game ball into the first accommodating portion or the second accommodating portion. Is regulated by the second rotation regulating means. As a result, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means alternately rotate to the first position and the second position or the third position and the fourth position, so that the game ball is reliably shaken alternately. Can be divided. Further, the rotation from the first position to the second position or the second position to the first position, the third position to the fourth position, or the fourth position to the third position causes the game ball to be accommodated in the first accommodating portion or the second accommodating portion or the second accommodating portion. When the ball is not in the section, it is regulated, so that it is possible to prevent the game ball from being continuously accepted in the same accommodating section. Therefore, the game balls can be distributed alternately more reliably.

The entrance of the ball, which is determined to satisfy the hit / fail judgment condition based on the entry of the game ball, the hit / fail judgment means for executing the hit / fail judgment of the game based on the establishment of the hit / miss judgment condition, and the hit / miss judgment means. Based on the winning / failing judgment result, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game that gives the player a privilege, the open state in which the game ball can be guided inside, and the game ball are guided inside. A determination condition for determining whether to change the movable piece from the closed state to the open state based on the movable piece that can be moved to the closed state and the game ball entering or passing through. A specific entrance determined to be established, a lottery determination means for executing a lottery for changing the movable piece from the closed state to the open state based on the establishment of the determination condition, and a winning by the lottery determination means. When it is determined, in a game machine having a movable means for moving the movable piece from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time, a taxiing winning means for guiding the game ball to the entrance. The distribution winning means has a distribution entry port in which a game ball can enter the distribution winning means, and a game ball entering the distribution entry port as a first flow path. The first flow path switching means that alternately distributes to the second flow path and the game ball that is distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are alternately distributed to the third flow path and the fourth flow path. It has a second flow path switching means for distributing to at least one of the first flow path switching means or the second flow path switching means from the outside of the distribution winning means, and an introduction guide path for guiding the game ball to at least one of the first flow path switching means or the second flow path switching means. At the guide port communicating with the outside of the taxiing winning means of the introduction guide path, the movable piece closes the guide port in the closed state, and the game ball is moved to the introduction guide path in the open state. The gaming machine J1 is characterized in that it is provided and configured to guide the player.

According to the gaming machine J1, it is determined that the winning / failing determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the gaming ball enters the entrance. Based on the establishment of the winning / failing determination condition, the winning / failing determination of the game is determined by the winning / failing determination means. Based on the result of the winning / failing determination by the winning / failing determination means, the privileged game that grants the privilege to the player is executed by the privileged game executing means. The judgment condition for determining whether to change the movable piece that can be moved between the open state in which the game ball can be guided and the closed state in which the game ball is difficult to guide is based on the entry of the game ball into the specific entry port. , And the lottery is executed by the lottery determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition. When the lottery result is determined to be a hit, the movable piece is moved from the closed state to the open state by the movable means for a predetermined time. In the distribution winning means for guiding the game ball to the entrance, the game ball that has entered the distribution entrance where the game ball can enter the distribution winning means is the first flow path and the second flow path. And are alternately sorted by the first flow path switching means. The game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are alternately distributed to the third flow path and the fourth flow path guided to the entry port by the second flow path switching means. The game ball is guided from the outside of the taxiing winning means to at least one of the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means by the introduction guide path. The movable piece provided at the guide port of the introduction guide path closes the guide port in the closed state, and guides the game ball to the introduction guide path in the open state. As a result, the player can enjoy by expecting whether or not the game ball that has entered the distribution winning means will enter the entrance. Therefore, every time a predetermined number of game balls are entered into the distribution winning means, the game balls are entered into the entrance, so that the player shakes how long after entering the entrance. It is possible to predict whether or not the ball needs to be entered into the prize-winning means, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. Further, since the game ball can be guided from the outside of the distribution winning means by opening the movable piece to at least one of the first flow path switching means or the second flow path switching means, the player can distribute. You can feel the freshness by directly entering the game ball without going through the ball mouth. Therefore, the player can be more interested in the game.

The entrance of the ball, which is determined to satisfy the hit / fail judgment condition based on the entry of the game ball, the hit / miss judgment means for executing the hit / fail judgment of the game based on the establishment of the hit / miss judgment condition, and the hit / miss judgment means. In a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that enables a variable winning device for giving a privilege to a player to win a game ball based on a winning / failing determination result. The distribution winning means for guiding the game ball to the entrance is provided, and the distribution winning means includes a distribution entrance at which the game ball can be inserted into the distribution winning means and the distribution winning means. A first flow path switching means having a first distribution movable means that moves alternately between a first position for distributing a game ball entering a ball mouth to a first flow path and a second position for distributing the game ball to a second flow path. And the third position where the game ball distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means is distributed to the third flow path and the fourth position where the game ball is distributed to the fourth flow path which is guided to the entry port. When a game ball is inserted into the variable winning device, the game ball is also inserted into the distribution entrance. The gaming machine K1 is characterized in that the variable winning device and the distribution winning means are arranged at positions where balls can be played.

According to the gaming machine K1, it is determined that the winning / failing determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the gaming ball enters the entrance. Based on the establishment of the winning / failing determination condition, the winning / failing determination of the game is determined by the winning / failing determination means. Based on the result of the winning / failing determination by the winning / failing determination means, the privileged game executing means executes the privileged game that enables the variable winning device that gives the player a privilege to win the game ball. In the distribution winning means for guiding the game ball to the entrance, the game ball that has entered the distribution entrance where the game ball can enter the distribution winning means is distributed to the first flow path. Distribution is performed by moving the first distribution movable means of the first flow path switching means alternately between the position and the second position for distribution to the second flow path. The game ball distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means is divided into a third position where it is distributed to the third flow path and a fourth position where the game ball is distributed to the fourth flow path guided to the entry port. Sorting is performed by alternately moving the second distribution movable means of the second flow path switching means. The variable winning device and the distribution winning means are arranged at positions where the game ball can be inserted into the distribution entrance when the game ball is inserted into the variable winning device. As a result, the player can enjoy by expecting whether or not the game ball that has entered the distribution winning means will enter the entrance. Therefore, every time a predetermined number of game balls are entered into the distribution winning means, the game balls are entered into the entrance, so that the player shakes how long after entering the entrance. It is possible to predict whether or not the ball needs to be entered into the prize-winning means, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. In addition, since it is possible to enter the ball into the distribution slot during the bonus game, by entering the ball into the distribution winning means during the bonus game, it is possible to enter the ball into the slot after the bonus game. The required number of balls can be reduced, and the player can be in an advantageous state. Therefore, the player can be motivated to enter a large number of game balls not only in the variable winning device but also in the distribution winning means during the privilege game.

In the gaming machine K1, at least a special privilege game in which the opening time of the variable winning means is long and a normal privilege game in which the opening time of the variable winning means is shorter than the special privilege game are set in the privilege game, and the winning / failing determination is made. The gaming machine K2 is characterized by having a privilege game type determining means for determining the type of the privilege game based on the result of winning or failing determination by the means.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least a special privilege game in which the opening time of the variable winning means is long and a normal privilege game in which the opening time of the variable winning means is shorter than the special privilege game are set in the privilege game, and the winning / failing judgment by the winning / failing determination means is set. Based on the result being a hit, the type of the privileged game is determined by the privileged game type determining means. As a result, when the special privilege game is decided, not only the opening time of the variable winning device becomes longer, but also an opportunity to get more game balls into the distribution winning means can be obtained. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with more benefits for the type of privileged game.

In the gaming machines K1 or K2, the variable winning device has a rotating door rotatably supported on the front side of the gaming machine, and normally, the variable winning device is in a state where the rotating door is upright. It is restricted that the game ball enters the inside, and when the privilege game is executed, the rotating door rotates to the front side of the game machine and receives the game ball flowing down the game area on the upper surface of the rotating door. The gaming machine K3 is configured to be guided to the inside of the variable winning device and the distribution ball opening.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines K1 or K2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable winning device is provided with a rotating door rotatably supported on the front side of the gaming machine. In the normal state, the rotating door in the upright state restricts the game ball from entering the variable winning device. When the privilege game is executed, the rotating door rotates toward the front side of the gaming machine, so that the game ball received on the upper surface of the rotating door is guided into the variable winning device and the distribution ball opening. As a result, more game balls can be entered into the distribution winning means during the privilege game. Therefore, the player can be made to continue to execute the game even after the privileged game, and the player can be made to play the game for a longer time.

The game in any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1 to C4, D1 or D2, E1 to E4, F1 or F2, G1 to G3, H1 or H2, I1 or I2, J1, K1 to K3. The machine is a game machine Z1 characterized by being a pachinko game machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device may be fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

The game in any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1 to C4, D1 or D2, E1 to E4, F1 or F2, G1 to G3, H1 or H2, I1 or I2, J1, K1 to K3. The gaming machine Z2 is characterized by being a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

The game in any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1 to C4, D1 or D2, E1 to E4, F1 or F2, G1 to G3, H1 or H2, I1 or I2, J1, K1 to K3. The machine is a gaming machine Z3 characterized in that it is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special gaming state occurs. "
<Others>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn for the success or failure of the game, and a dynamic display of a special symbol for notifying the lottery result is displayed as a display device. It has been proposed that it is configured to be performed in.
For example, in Patent Document 1, the probability that a game ball wins a prize at a starting port provided on the game board surface is changed by adjusting the interval between nails provided on the game board surface (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-305209).
However, in such a gaming machine, since the process until the gaming ball wins a prize at the starting port is monotonous, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game when playing the game for a long time.
An object of the present technical idea is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a problem that a player gets tired of playing a gaming machine as described above.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 has a ball entrance that is determined to satisfy the hit / fail judgment condition based on the entry of the game ball, and a game based on the establishment of the hit / fail judgment condition. It has a winning / failing determination means for executing the winning / failing determination of the above, and a privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game for giving a privilege to the player based on the winning / failing determination result of the winning / failing determination means. The distribution winning means for guiding the game ball to the ball entry port is provided, and the distribution winning means includes a distribution ball opening in which the game ball can be inserted into the distribution winning means and the distribution winning means. A first flow path switching means having a first distribution movable means that moves alternately between a first position for distributing a game ball entering a ball mouth to a first flow path and a second position for distributing the game ball to a second flow path. And the fourth flow path that distributes the game ball distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means to the third position for distributing to the third flow path and the fourth flow path that guides the game ball to the entry port. A second flow path switching means having a second distribution movable means that moves alternately with the position, a position determining means that at least determines the position of the second distribution movable means, and a game at the entrance. When the ball enters, the position monitoring means for determining whether the position is normal and the position monitoring means are abnormal based on the position with the second distribution movable means determined by the position determining means. It has an abnormal processing execution means for executing an abnormal processing when it is determined to be.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, when the game ball enters the ball entrance, the distribution ball opening is later than the ball entering the ball. When a game ball has entered the ball, there is a subsequent position determining means for determining that the game ball subsequently entered has moved the first distribution movable means and the second distribution movable means. Then, when the game ball enters the ball entrance, the position monitoring means determines whether the position is normal based on the determination result of the subsequent position determining means.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, it is determined that the winning / failing determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the gaming ball enters the entrance. Based on the establishment of the winning / failing determination condition, the winning / failing determination of the game is determined by the winning / failing determination means. Based on the result of the winning / failing determination by the winning / failing determination means, the privileged game that grants the privilege to the player is executed by the privileged game executing means.
In the distribution winning means that guides the game ball to the entrance, the first position in which the game ball that has entered the distribution entrance where the game ball can enter the distribution winning means is distributed to the first flow path. It is distributed by the first flow path switching means having the first distribution movable means which is movable alternately with the second position which is distributed to the second flow path. The game ball distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means is divided into a third position where it is distributed to the third flow path and a fourth position where the game ball is distributed to the fourth flow path guided to the entry port. Sorting is performed by a second flow path switching means having a second sorting movable means that moves alternately.
The position of the second distribution movable means is determined by the position determining means. When the game ball enters the ball entrance, the position monitoring means determines whether the position is normal or not based on the position of the second position movable means determined by the position determining means. Then, when the position monitoring means determines that it is abnormal, the abnormal processing is executed by the abnormal processing executing means.
As a result, the player can enjoy by expecting whether or not the game ball that has entered the distribution winning means will enter the entrance. Therefore, every time a predetermined number of game balls are entered into the distribution winning means, the game balls are entered into the entrance, so that the player shakes how long after entering the entrance. It is possible to predict whether or not the ball needs to be entered into the prize-winning means, and it is possible to provide more enjoyment of the game.
Further, when a game ball enters the ball entry port, it is determined whether or not the ball is abnormally entered based on the position of the second distribution movable means, so that illegal entry can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that the damage caused by illegally entering the ball into the ball entrance can be reduced.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1. That is, when a game ball enters the ball entrance, if the game ball enters the distribution slot after the ball entered, the game ball entered after that. Is determined by the subsequent position determination means that the first distribution movable means and the second distribution movable means have been moved. When a game ball enters the ball entrance, the position determination means determines whether the position is normal or not based on the determination result of the subsequent position determination means. Therefore, when a game ball enters the ball entry port, it is possible to more accurately determine whether or not the ball has entered the ball entry port by a normal game. Therefore, there is an effect that the damage caused by fraud can be reduced.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
64 Sorting prize device (sorting ball means)
64a1 1st distribution rotating member (part of flow path switching means)
64a2 2nd distribution rotating member (part of flow path switching means)
64a3 3rd distribution rotating member (part of flow path switching means)
64a4 4th distribution rotating member (part of flow path switching means)
64a5 5th distribution rotating member (part of flow path switching means)
64a6 6th distribution rotating member (part of flow path switching means)
64a7 7th distribution rotating member (part of flow path switching means)
64a8 8th distribution rotating member (part of flow path switching means)
71 1st starting port (privilege entry means)
81 Third symbol display device (display means)
203e distribution winning ball number counter (ball winning number counting means )
222a Pseudo-variation table (part of pseudo-dynamic display mode determination means)
640 ball slot (sorted ball slot)
S1 2 03 jackpots control process (award game execution means)
S1612 (Pseudo-dynamic display mode determining means)

Claims (1)

Display means for displaying game information related to the game,
In a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the specific game information is displayed on the display means.
It has a distribution ball means that can distribute the game ball to a plurality of flow paths.
The distribution ball means
A distribution ball opening that allows a game ball to enter the distribution ball means,
It has a flow path switching means for switching and distributing the flow path through which the game ball flows down to the plurality of flow paths based on a predetermined rule.
The gaming machine
A ball entry counting means that updates the count value according to the number of game balls that have entered the distribution entry slot, and
Of the plurality of pseudo-identification information dynamic display modes based on the count value of the ball entry counting means, triggered by the establishment of the condition for starting the dynamic display of the pseudo-identification information, which is one of the game information. It has a pseudo-dynamic display mode determining means for determining one pseudo-dynamic display mode, and
Among the plurality of flow channels, one flow path is configured such gaming ball and guide the game balls to award ball entrance means privilege is granted to be advantageous to the player by ball entrance ,
The flow path in the cover member provided in front of the switching means, a game machine, characterized in Rukoto patterns have been assigned to cause difficulties viewing the flow path switching unit.

Images